2013 Dodge Charger Owner's Manual
Upcoming SlideShare
Loading in...5
×
 

Like this? Share it with your network

Share

2013 Dodge Charger Owner's Manual

on

  • 3,692 views

2013 Dodge Charger Owner's Manual, Naples Dodge Chrysler Jeep Ram, Naples, Bonita Springs, Fort Myers, Florida. www.naplesdodge.com

2013 Dodge Charger Owner's Manual, Naples Dodge Chrysler Jeep Ram, Naples, Bonita Springs, Fort Myers, Florida. www.naplesdodge.com

Statistics

Views

Total Views
3,692
Views on SlideShare
3,692
Embed Views
0

Actions

Likes
0
Downloads
3
Comments
0

0 Embeds 0

No embeds

Accessibility

Categories

Upload Details

Uploaded via as Adobe PDF

Usage Rights

© All Rights Reserved

Report content

Flagged as inappropriate Flag as inappropriate
Flag as inappropriate

Select your reason for flagging this presentation as inappropriate.

Cancel
  • Full Name Full Name Comment goes here.
    Are you sure you want to
    Your message goes here
    Processing…
Post Comment
Edit your comment

2013 Dodge Charger Owner's Manual Presentation Transcript

  • 1. 2013 charger 2013 OWNER’S MANUAL chargerChrysler Group LLC13D481-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
  • 2. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADAWith respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation ofChrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or optionalname Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available orDRIVING AND ALCOHOL were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard anyDrunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of features and equipment described in this manual that areaccidents. not on this vehicle.Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with bloodalcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes indrinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking design and specifications, and/or make additions to ordriver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. improvements to its products without imposing any obliga- tion upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC drinking. Never drink and then drive.
  • 3. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 910 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 10
  • 4. INTRODUCTION 1CONTENTSⅥ INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Ⅵ VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6Ⅵ HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Ⅵ VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7Ⅵ WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
  • 5. 4 INTRODUCTIONINTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group nicians and genuine MOPAR௡ parts, and cares aboutLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision your satisfaction.workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - allessentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUALThis Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which sectiontance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on thecustomer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions andread these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manualassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of theshould be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughouting and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual:
  • 6. INTRODUCTION 5 1
  • 7. 6 INTRODUCTIONWARNINGS AND CAUTIONSThis Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-erating procedures that could result in a collision orbodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If youdo not read this entire Owners Manual, you may missimportant information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-tions.VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERThe Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the leftfront corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible VIN Locationfrom outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also locatednumber also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart-Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.vehicle registration, and the title.
  • 8. INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS 1 WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. VIN LocationNOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
  • 9. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLECONTENTS 2Ⅵ A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Ⅵ VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19Ⅵ SENTRY KEY௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Ⅵ ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .20 ▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Ⅵ REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
  • 10. 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Ⅵ WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .24 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .24 Ⅵ TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Ⅵ TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Ⅵ REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — Ⅵ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Ⅵ OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 ▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Ⅵ DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .54 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .55 ▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — ▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 ▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56Ⅵ KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
  • 11. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Ⅵ ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .95 (BeltAlert௡) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Ⅵ SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 2▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .58 ▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97▫ Supplemental Restraint System ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The (SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .65 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
  • 12. 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEA WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminateYour vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, andconsists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during starttransmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN). RUN will illuminate.Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change withThis vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) mayfeature, (refer to ЉKeyless Enter-N-Go™Љ in ЉThings To have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back upKnow Before Starting Your VehicleЉ for further informa- method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Puttion). the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button andKeyless Ignition Node (KIN) push to operate the ignition switch.This feature allows the driver to operate the ignitionswitch with the push of a button, as long as the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passengercompartment.
  • 13. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob. 2 The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park- ing. Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)1 — OFF2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)3 — ON/RUN
  • 14. 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Ignition Or Accessory On Messageon the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC orand then pull the key out with your other hand. ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster. NOTE: With the Uconnect௡ system, the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Emergency Key RemovalNOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency keyinto the lock cylinders with either side up.
  • 15. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING! CAUTION!• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition 2• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle access to an unlocked vehicle. unattended.• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or SENTRY KEYா others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- dren should be warned not to touch the parking ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked in a location accessible to children, and do not or unlocked. leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/ RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry other controls, or move the vehicle. (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a• Do not leave children or animals inside parked RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the cause serious injury or death. vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
  • 16. 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEAfter cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the CAUTION!Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for abulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer system is not compat-indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In ible with some after-market remote starting systems.addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, Use of these systems may result in vehicle startingit indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start problems and loss of security protection.the engine. Either of these conditions will result in theengine being shut off after two seconds. All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normalvehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 Replacement Keysseconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron- NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to theics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate theas possible by an authorized dealer. vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
  • 17. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 NOTE: When having the Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer Sys- CAUTION! tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an • Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and authorized dealer. lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat- Customer Key Programming 2 tended. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be always remember to place the ignition in the OFF performed at an authorized dealer. position. General InformationAt the time of purchase, the original owner is provided The Sentry Key௡ system complies with FCC rules Part 15with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation isKeep the PIN in a secure location. This number is subject to the following conditions:required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. • This device may not cause harmful interference.Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a • This device must accept any interference that may beblank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob received, including interference that may cause unde-is one that has never been programmed. sired operation.
  • 18. 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEVEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED To Arm The SystemThe Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ 1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer toStart/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the ЉStarting ProceduresЉ in ЉStarting And OperatingЉ forVehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for further information).door locks and decklid release are disabled. If somethingtriggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro- • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn make sure the vehicle ignition system is ЉOFFЉ.will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster make sure the vehicle ignition system is ЉOFFЉ and thewill flash. key is physically removed from the ignition.Rearming Of The System 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock theIf something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to vehicle:disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn • Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switchoff after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off with the driver and/or passenger door open.after 15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle SecurityAlarm will rearm itself. • Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same
  • 19. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19exterior zone (refer to ЉKeyless Enter-N-Go™Љ in ЉThings • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFFTo Know Before Starting Your VehicleЉ for further infor- position.mation). • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ,• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button 2(RKE) transmitter. (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle). • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-3. If any doors are open, close them. Go™ , insert a valid key into the ignition switch andTo Disarm The System turn the key to the ON position.The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of NOTE:the following methods: • The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Entry (RKE) transmitter. Security Alarm.• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior equipped, refer to ЉKeyless Enter-N-Go™ Љ in ЉThings power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. To Know Before Starting Your VehicleЉ for further information). The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
  • 20. 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEsystem will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- Security System Manual Overrideously described arming sequences has occurred, the The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock theVehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether doors using the manual door lock plunger.you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicleand open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPEDdisarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. The courtesy lights will turn on when you use theIf the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock thebecomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will doors or open any door.remain armed when the battery is reconnected; theexterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this This feature also turns on the approach lighting in theoccurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-Tamper Alert ther information.If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 secondsyour absence, the horn will sound three times and the or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition isexterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
  • 21. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21NOTE: NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour- ter buttons for all RKE transmitters. tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the “Dome ON” position (extreme top position). 2• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-heldKey Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter doesnot need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate thesystem. Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
  • 22. 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo Unlock The Doors Flash Lights With LockPress and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash whentransmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To changelights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The the current setting, refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” inilluminated entry system will also turn on. “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to formation.“Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” under “Things To Know Before Turn Headlights On With Remote Key UnlockStarting Your Vehicle” for further information. This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 secondsRemote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.Press The time for this feature is programmable on vehiclesThis feature lets you program the system to unlock either equipped through Uconnect௡ . To change the currentthe driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the setting, refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “UnderstandingUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the Your Instrument Panel” for further information.current setting, refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
  • 23. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23To Lock The Doors If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” under “Things To Know BeforePress and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash andthe horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. Using The Panic Alarm 2If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least oneStarting Your Vehicle” for further information. second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, theSound Horn With Remote Key Lock headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights willThis feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors turn on.are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can beturned on or turned off. To change the current setting, The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unlessrefer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button aInstrument Panel” for further information. second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater.To Unlatch The TrunkPress the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter twotimes within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
  • 24. 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: NOTE:• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back and horn will remain on. housing or the printed circuit board.• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted with your thumb and then pull the key out with your by the system. other hand.Programming Additional Transmitters 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat bladeProgramming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halvesperformed at an authorized dealer. of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damageTransmitter Battery Replacement the seal during removal.The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032battery.
  • 25. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol. 4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two 2 halves together. General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. Emergency Key Removal • This device must accept any interference received,3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over including interference that may cause undesired op- (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a eration. solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery proved by the party responsible for compliance could clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
  • 26. 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEIf your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal NOTE:distance, check for these two conditions: • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. life of the battery is a minimum of three years. • Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station reduce this range. tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB How To Use Remote Start radios. All of the following conditions must be met before theREMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED engine will remote start: • Shift lever in PARK This system uses the Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the • Doors closed engine conveniently from outside the vehicle • Hood closed while still maintaining security. The system hasa range of approximately 300 ft (91 m). • Trunk closed • HAZARD switch off • BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
  • 27. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27• Battery at an acceptable charge level Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped• RKE PANIC button not pressed The following messages will display in the EVIC if the• System not disabled from previous remote start event vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema- 2• Vehicle theft alarm not active turely:• Ignition in OFF position • Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar WARNING! • Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon- • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in- jury or death when inhaled. The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled • Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to the ON/RUN position. away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.
  • 28. 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo Enter Remote Start Mode • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec- you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if Vehicleprogrammed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time orwill remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.cycle. NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the systemNOTE: will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. Start request.• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.• For security, power window and power sunroof op- eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
  • 29. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Cancel Remote StartBefore the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the followingUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the occur:doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if • The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm 2equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,press and release the START/STOP button. • Any engine warning lights come onNOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in • Low Fuel Light turns onthe EVIC until you push the START button. • The hood is opened • The hazard switch is pressed • The shift lever is moved out of PARK • The brake pedal is pressed
  • 30. 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEDOOR LOCKSManual Door LocksTo lock each door, push the door lock knob on each doortrim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull theinside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the reardoors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panelupward. Door Lock Knob If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
  • 31. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)• For personal security and safety in the event of a • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as in a location accessible to children, and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N- 2 well as when you park and leave the vehicle.• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. operate power windows, other controls, or move• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with the vehicle. access to an unlocked vehicle.• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. (Continued)
  • 32. 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEPower Door Locks The doors can also be locked and unlocked with theA power door lock switch is on each front door trim Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For furtherpanel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob. Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped Power Door Lock Switch The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
  • 33. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programmingauthorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect௡ Set-service. tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forAutomatic Unlock Doors On Exit further information. 2The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit featurepower door locks if: in accordance with local laws.1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear abled. Doors2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to To provide a safer environment for small children riding 0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission shift lever is in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with placed in NEUTRAL. Child-Protection Door Lock system.3. The driver door is opened. To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock System4. The doors were not previously unlocked. 1. Open the rear door. 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
  • 34. 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door. Child-Protection Door Lock Function Child-Protection Door Lock Location WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged.
  • 35. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has beenmove the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlockwindow and open the door with the outside door handle. sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re- sponse time. 2KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ • If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter orThe Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds,vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm thefeature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you theft alarm.to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having topress the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.NOTE:• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- ment Panel” for further information.
  • 36. 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo Unlock From The Driver’s Side: NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the frontWith a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer todoor handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically. “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the ment Panel” for further information.door is unlocked. To Unlock From The Passenger Side: With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati- cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked. NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
  • 37. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE To Enter The TrunkTransmitter In Vehicle With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ftTo minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a (1.5 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the right sidePassive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the of CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is 2Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door located on the deck lid.unlock feature which will function if the ignition switchis in the OFF positionIf one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panelswitch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doorshave been closed the vehicle checks the inside andoutside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKEtransmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKEtransmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no othervalid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automaticallyunlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive CHMSL ButtonEntry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
  • 38. 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s PassiveEntry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close thedeck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unlessanother one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit-ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of thedeck lid.To Lock The Vehicle’s DoorsWith one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitterswithin 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front doorhandles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock bothdoors. Press The Door Handle Button To LockDo NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the doorhandle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
  • 39. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 NOTE: • After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This 2 is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking. • The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead. The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKEDo NOT Grab The handle When Locking transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
  • 40. 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEWINDOWS There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.Power Windows The window controls will operate only when the ignitionThe window controls on the driver’s door control all the is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.door windows. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect௡, the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- formation. Power Window Switches
  • 41. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 To open the window part way, press the window switch WARNING! to the first detent and release it when you want the Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do window to stop. not let children play with power windows. Do not 2 To stop the window from going all the way down during leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu- AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection larly unattended children, can become entrapped by Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and the windows while operating the power window the window will go up automatically. switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.AUTO-Down Feature To close the window part way, lift the window switch toThe driver door power window switch and some model the first detent and release it when you want the windowpassenger door power window switches have an AUTO- to stop.down feature. Press the window switch to the seconddetent, release, and the window will go down automati-cally.
  • 42. 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Reset Auto-Up• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window closure, it will reverse direction and then go back probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up: down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window switch again to close the window. completely and continue to hold the switch up for an• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger additional two seconds after the window is closed. the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto- 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the detent to open the window completely and continue first detent and hold to close the window manually. to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open. WARNING! Window Lockout Switch There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim window before closing. panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls, press and release the window lockout button (setting it in
  • 43. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43the DOWN position). To enable the window controls, Wind Buffetingpress and release the window lockout button again Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of(setting it in the UP position). pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the 2 windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun- roof opening to minimize the buffeting. TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by Window Lockout Switch pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
  • 44. 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the With the ignition in the OFF position or the key removedbutton will operate. from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed. The trunk lid can be released from Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know outside the vehicle by pressing the Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on TRUNK button on the Remote trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds. TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING! Trunk Release Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, Button either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close theWith the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once inOpen symbol will display in the instrument cluster the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display even if they entered through the rear seat. If trappedwill reappear once the trunk is closed. in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
  • 45. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSAs a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release Some of the most important safety features in yourlever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the vehicle are the restraint systems:event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the • Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and 2trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-the- all passengersdark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism. • Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a window • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) • An energy-absorbing steering column and steering wheel • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants Trunk Emergency Internal Release
  • 46. 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage enhance occupant protection by managing occupant inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different energy during an impact event rates of inflation based on several factors, including the severity and type of collision.• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt risk of harm from a deploying air bag: all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large buckled up in a rear seat. item in a seat — if equippedIf you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized WARNING!seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tetherfor CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold Infants in rear facing child restraints should neverinfant and child restraint systems. For more information ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passengeron LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment canCHildren (LATCH). cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi- tion. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
  • 47. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt- 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If yourpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, thechild restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should side air bags will inflate forcefully into the spaceride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow between you and the door. 2children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to betheir arm. modified to accommodate a disabled person, contactIf a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child the Customer Center. Phone numbers are providedseat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat under ؆If You Need Assistance؆.as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.(Refer to “Child Restraints”) WARNING!You should read the instructions provided with your • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to morechild restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work2. All occupants should always wear their lap and with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In shoulder belts properly. some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have3. The driver and front passenger seats should be air bags. moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate. (Continued)
  • 48. 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment much greater injuries if you are not properly buck- could cause serious injury, including death. Air led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your instrument panel. vehicle are buckled up properly.• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain • Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag (SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause door or window. Sit upright in the center of the you to be severely injured or killed. seat. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even (Continued) on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
  • 49. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown WARNING!from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility ofejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside orinside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in 2be belted at all times. these areas are more likely to be seriously injuredLap/Shoulder Belts or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourAll seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatlap/shoulder belts. belts.The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andvery sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the using a seat belt properly.shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seatnormal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will belts are designed to go around the large bones oflock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the your body. These are the strongest parts of yourvehicle or being thrown out. body and can take the forces of a collision best. (Continued)
  • 50. 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat. WARNING! (Continued) Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might the belt go around your lap. suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the front seat. Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
  • 51. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 513. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch WARNING! plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” • A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride 2 too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop- erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. (Continued) Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
  • 52. 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your WARNING! (Continued) abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause inter- belt in a collision. nal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a colli- sion.• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. Removing Slack From Belt
  • 53. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. WARNING! The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi- • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. 2 be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as WARNING! possible and keep it snug. • A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi- Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do ately and have it fixed. not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac- etc.). tor will withdraw any slack in the belt. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
  • 54. 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEabove the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it you will prefer a higher position. When you release theup or down to the position that fits you best. anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. 2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top ofAs a guide, if you are shorter than average you will the latch plate.prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing.
  • 55. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions If the passenger seating position is equipped with anThe seat belts in the passenger seating positions are ALR and is being used for normal usage:equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortablywhich are used to secure a child restraint system. For wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not 2additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re- activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear astraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbingRestraints” section. The chart below defines the type of to retract completely in this case and then carefully pullfeature for each seating position. out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the Driver Center Passenger latch plate into the buckle until you hear a Љclick.Љ First Row N/A N/A ALR Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Second Row ALR ALR ALR Equipped• N/A — Not Applicable In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre- locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail- able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina- tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
  • 56. 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEposition that has a belt with this feature. Children 12 WARNING!years old and under should always be properly re-strained in the rear seat. • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced ifHow To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. working properly when checked according to the2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until procedures in the Service Manual. the entire belt is extracted. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is Energy Management Feature now in the Automatic Locking Mode. This vehicle has a safety belt system with an EnergyHow To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-onUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it collision.to retract completely to disengage the Automatic LockingMode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that islocking mode. designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
  • 57. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57Seat Belt Pretensioners Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder SystemThe seat belts for both front seating positions are (BeltAlertா)equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to BeltAlert௡ is a feature intended to remind the driver andremove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. front passenger (if equipped with front passenger 2These devices may improve the performance of the seat BeltAlert௡) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is activebelt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seatearly in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light willpants, including those in child restraints. turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened.NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seatbelt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be The BeltAlert௡ warning sequence begins after the vehicleworn snugly and positioned properly. speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entirestraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Remindera deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
  • 58. 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEunbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belts And Pregnant Women(8 km/h), BeltAlert௡ will provide both audio and visual We recommend that pregnant women use the seat beltsnotification. throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe isThe front passenger seat BeltAlert௡ is not active when the the best way to keep the baby safe.front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert௡ may be Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belttriggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if Keep the belt low so that it does not come across theequipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will takethe rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are the force if there is a collision.secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. Seat Belt ExtenderBeltAlert௡ can be enabled or disabled by your authorizeddealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac- If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended andtivating BeltAlert௡. when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorizedNOTE: Although BeltAlert௡ has been deactivated, the dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. ThisSeat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate extender should be used only if the existing belt is notwhile the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-BeltAlert௡) seat belt remains unfastened. tender and store it.
  • 59. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNING! Using a seat belt extender when not needed can in- crease the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when 2 the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed.Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air BagsThis vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both thedriver and front passenger as a supplement to the seatbelt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster LocationsBag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. Thepassenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the 1 — Driver And Passenger Ad- 2 — Knee Bolsterinstrument panel, above the glove compartment. The vanced Front Air Bags 3 — Supplemental Driver Sidewords SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. Knee Air BagIn addition, the vehicle is equipped with a SupplementalDriver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrumentpanel below the steering column.
  • 60. 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABICAir Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for air bags are located above the side windows and theirAdvanced Air Bags. covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhancedinflation based on several factors, including the severity protection for an occupant during a side impact. Theand type of collision. SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front NOTE:passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust theinflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.seat position.This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to anpassenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether authorized dealer immediately.the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The Air Bag System Componentsseat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bagAdvanced Front Air Bags. system components:This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
  • 61. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61• Air Bag Warning Light Advanced Front Air Bag Features• Steering Wheel and Column The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides• Instrument Panel output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as 2• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),• Knee Impact Bolster which may receive information from the front impact sensors.• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)• Front and Side Impact Sensors• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors
  • 62. 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) WARNING! Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may• No objects should be placed over or near the air provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant bag on the instrument panel, because any such during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats. collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way.• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label etc.
  • 63. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between thefront and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bagdeploys independently; a left side impact deploys the leftair bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air 2bag only.Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain(SABIC)SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to frontand rear seat outboard occupants in addition to thatprovided by the body structure. Each air bag featuresinflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of eachoutboard occupant that reduce the potential for side- Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward, NOTE:covering both windows on the impact side. • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. • Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
  • 64. 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThe system includes side impact sensors that are cali- WARNING! (Continued)brated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags duringimpacts that require air bag occupant protection. • If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do not have any accessory items installed which WARNING! will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require • If your vehicle is equipped with left and right permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal- Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof (SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up of the vehicle for any reason. high enough to block the location of the SABIC. The area where the SABIC is located should remain SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt free from any obstructions. restraint system. Occupants, including children who are • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be between you and the side air bags; the performance seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially chil- could be adversely affected and/or objects could be dren, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side pushed into you, causing serious injury. windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. (Continued) Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
  • 65. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controlsbooster seat recommended for the size and weight of the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)child. The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety systemSupplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag required for this vehicle. 2The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/orenhanced protection and works together with the Driver side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact. Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronicKnee Impact Bolsters ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air bags, SAB, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, andThe Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending onfront passenger, and position the front occupant for the several factors, including the severity and type of impact.best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag. Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver SideAlong with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec-Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontalAir Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide collisions depending on several factors, including theimproved protection for the driver and front passenger. severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air BagsSide air bags also work with seat belts to improve are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,occupant protection. or rollover collisions.
  • 66. 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThe Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions, sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,including some that may produce substantial vehicle away from an inflating air bag.damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts ofunderrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other the air bag system whenever the ignition is in thehand, depending on the type and location of impact, ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position, or inAdvanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the airlittle vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe bags will not inflate.initial deceleration. The ORC contains a backup power supply system thatThe side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power orSide air bag deployment will depend on the severity and it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.type of collision. Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag WarningBecause air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration Light in the instrument panel for approxi-over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are mately four to eight seconds for a self-checknot good indicators of whether or not an air bag should when the ignition is first turned on. After thehave deployed. self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
  • 67. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bagor continuously. A single chime will sound if the light Inflator Unitscomes on again after initial startup. The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air BagIt also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering 2ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-tics also record the nature of the malfunction. vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the WARNING! Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates are possible, based on several factors, including the Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while air bag system immediately. helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
  • 68. 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEThe Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air Inflator Unitsbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) areSupplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator designed to activate only in certain side collisions.Unit The ORC determines if a side collision requires the sideThe Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type oflocated in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering collision.column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Based on the severity and type of collision, the side airAdvanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may belarge quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. TheSupplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the spaceseparates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflateinflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very15 to 20 milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side high speed and with such a high force that it could injureKnee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in you if you are not seated properly, or if items arethe side of the air bag. positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children.
  • 69. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,(SABIC) Inflator Units vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.During collisions where the impact is confined to aparticular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may Front And Side Impact Sensors 2deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid theand type of collision. In these events, the ORC will ORC in determining appropriate response to impactdeploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle. events.A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side Enhanced Accident Response Systemcurtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushesthe outside edge of the headliner out of the way and In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, ifcovers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 the communication network remains intact, and themilliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes power remains intact, depending on the nature of theto blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you event the ORC will determine whether to have theare not belted and seated properly, or if items are Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag ing functions:inflates. This especially applies to children. The side • Cut off fuel to the engine.curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick whenit is inflated. • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition is cycled off.
  • 70. 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any the battery has power or until the ignition key is or all of the following may occur: removed. • The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause• Unlock the doors automatically. abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. TheIn order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or thosefunctions after an event, the ignition switch must be you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasiumchanged from IGN ON to IGN OFF. floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.If A Deployment Occurs They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within aThe Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctorimmediately after deployment. immediately.NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-likecollisions. This does not mean something is wrong with particles. The particles are a normal by-product of thethe air bag system. process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
  • 71. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on Maintaining Your Air Bag System your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in- structions for cleaning. WARNING!Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- • Modifications to any part of the air bag system 2ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air could cause it to fail when you need it. You couldbags will not be in place to protect you. be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or WARNING! wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac- add aftermarket side steps or running boards. tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im- • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con- bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who troller (ORC) system serviced as well. works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. (Continued)
  • 72. 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Air Bag Warning Light WARNING! (Continued)• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may You will want to have the air bags ready to not function properly if modifications are made. inflate for your protection in a collision. The Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal air bag system service. If your seat, including your circuits and interconnecting wiring associated trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any with air bag system electrical components. While the air way (including removal or loosening/tightening of bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved the air bag system immediately. seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during modify the air bag system for persons with dis- the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first abilities, contact your authorized dealer. cycled to the ON/RUN. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
  • 73. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety beltsrelated gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint were buckled/fastened;Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing thenot be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check 2 accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located onthe inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag • How fast the vehicle was traveling.fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good. These data can help provide a better understanding ofEvent Data Recorder (EDR) the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded bycertain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type ofvehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of personally identifying data routinely acquired during atime, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle crash investigation.is designed to record such data as:• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
  • 74. 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is Children 12 years or younger should ride properlyrequired, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crashIn addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, statistics, children are safer when properly restrained insuch as law enforcement, that have the special equip- the rear seats rather than in the front.ment, can read the information if they have access to the There are different sizes and types of restraints forvehicle or the EDR. children from newborn size to the child almost largeChild Restraints enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correctEveryone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all seat for your child.times, including babies and children. Every state in theUnited States, and every Canadian province, requiresthat small children ride in proper restraint systems. Thisis the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
  • 75. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has WARNING!a label certifying that it meets all applicable SafetyStandards. You should also make sure that you can install In a collision, an unrestrained child can become ait in the vehicle where you will use it. projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to 2NOTE: For additional information, refer to hold even an infant on your lap could become sowww.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana- great that you could not hold the child, no matterdian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web- how strong you are. The child and others could besite for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/ badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicleeng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
  • 76. 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESummary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child RestraintInfants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible and who have not reached the height or Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear weight limits of their child restraint seat of the vehicleSmall Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five- who have out-grown the height or weight point Harness, facing forward in the rear limit of their rear-facing child restraint seat of the vehicleLarger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle forward-facing child restraint, but are too seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat beltChildren Too Large Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat offor Child Restraints out-grown the height or weight limit of the vehicle their booster seat
  • 77. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77Infants And Child Restraints WARNING!Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of anthey reach either the height or weight limit of their rear air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air 2facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible years or younger, including a child in a rearwardchild seats. facing infant seat. • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rearThe infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the seat.vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth untilthey reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Older Children And Child RestraintsConvertible child seats can be used either rearward- Children who are two years old or who have outgrownfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward- facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats andfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown tion are for children who are over two years old or whotheir infant carrier but are still less than at least two years have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit ofold. Children should remain rearward-facing until they their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children shouldreach the highest weight or height allowed by theirconvertible child seat.
  • 78. 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEremain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for WARNING!as long as possible, up to the highest weight or heightallowed by the child seat. • Improper installation can lead to failure of anAll children whose weight or height is above the infant or child restraint. It could come loose in aforward-facing limit for the child seat should use a collision. The child could be badly injured orbelt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’sfit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over directions exactly when installing an infant orthe vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against child restraint.the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it inseat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-in the vehicle by the seat belt. ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
  • 79. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79Children Too Large For Booster Seats 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touchingChildren who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt the child’s thighs and not their stomach?comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?over the front of the seat when their back is against the 2seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If thesimple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use thevehicle’s seat belt alone: child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri- odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face the vehicle seat? or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back. way back?3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?
  • 80. 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLERecommendations For Attaching Child RestraintsRestraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below Weight of the LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top Child + Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only + Top Tether Anchor Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Rear-Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
  • 81. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-Restraint System age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH- 2 equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.
  • 82. 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLELATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints InThis Vehicle Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seatingposition Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
  • 83. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83What is the weight limit (child’s 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage systemweight + weight of the child re- until the combined weight of thestraint) for using the LATCH an- child and the child restraint ischorage system to attach the child 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt 2restraint? and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Can the LATCH anchorages and No Do not use the seat belt when you the seat belt be used together to use the LATCH anchorage system attach a rear-facing or forward- to attach a rear-facing or forward- facing child restraint? facing child restraint.Can a child seat be installed in the N/A center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?
  • 84. 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Can two child restraints be at- No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage tached using a common lower with two or more child restraints. LATCH anchorage? If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor- ages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes The child seat may touch the back touch the back of the front passen- of the front passenger seat if the ger seat? child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child re- straint owner’s manual for more information. Can the head restraints be re- Yes, center position only. moved?
  • 85. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it 2 meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym- bols on the seatback. They are just visible whenyou lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gapbetween the seatback and seat cushion. LATCH Anchorages Locating The LATCH Anchorages In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear
  • 86. 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEwindow. These tether strap anchorages are under a anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and someplastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it. rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Center Seat LATCH If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position. WARNING! Tether Strap AnchoragesLATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be Never use the same lower anchorage to attach moreequipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. than one child restraint. Please refer to “InstallingEach will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” foranchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the typical installation instructions.
  • 87. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu- 3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages forfacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child that seating position. For some second row seats, yourestraint systems will be installed as described here. may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. 2To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint 4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto- restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat ing position. belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child position has. Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- tions to attach a tether anchor.2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack anchorages. in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- turer’s instructions.
  • 88. 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt them. path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. WARNING!How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt Improper installation of a child restraint to theWhen using the LATCH attaching system to install a LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.used by other occupants or being used to secure child Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directionsrestraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seatinstalling a child restraint using the LATCH system, Beltbuckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out ofthe child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with The seat belts in the passenger seating positions arethe child restraint installation, instead of buckling it equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Lockingbehind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Bothchild restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion ofthe seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
  • 89. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Childretract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will Restraints in this Vehiclemake a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled backinto the retractor. For additional information on ALR, 2refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-der “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate isdesigned to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tightwhen webbing is pulled tight and straight through achild restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below andthe following sections for more information about bothtypes of seat belts.
  • 90. 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEWhat is the weight limit (child’s Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor whenweight + weight of the child re- using the seat belt to install a for-straint) for using the Tether Anchor ward facing child restraint, up to thewith the seat belt to attach a forward recommended weight limit of thefacing child restraint? child restraint.Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front passengertouch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is al-seat? lowed, if the child restraint manu- facturer also allows contact.Can the head restraints be removed? Yes, center position only.Can the buckle stalk be twisted to Yes In positions with cinching latchtighten the seat belt against the belt plates (CINCH), the buckle stalkpath of the child restraint? may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
  • 91. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, youAutomatic Locking Retractor (ALR) will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is 2 recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a locked, you should not be able to pull out any web- better fit. bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. lap portion around the child restraint while you push Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether against the child seat. strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing attach a tether anchor. out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
  • 92. 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt “click.” path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) 4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the in any direction. lap portion around the child restraint while you pushAny seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the the child restraint rearward and downward into thebelt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. vehicle seat.Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and theLatch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil- dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. attach a tether anchor.2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. path.
  • 93. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tetherbelt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. AnchorageIf the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to thebelt path opening of the child restraint, you may have 1. Look behind the seating position where you 2trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon- plan to install the child restraint to find thenect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short tether anchorage. You may need to move thebuckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert seat forward to provide better access to thethe latch plate into the buckle with the release button tether anchorage. If there is no top tetherfacing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 anchorage for that seating position (see theto 6, above, to complete the installation of the child charts above), move the child restraint torestraint. another position in the vehicle if one is available.If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten thebuckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directlythe buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate behind the seat where you are placing the childinto the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint.restraint installation tight, try a different seating position. 3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
  • 94. 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. Adjustable Headrest Downward Position Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button
  • 95. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. 2 An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS Tether Strap Mounting A long break-in period is not required for the engine and1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
  • 96. 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEWhile cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the CAUTION!limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oilmental and should be avoided. in the engine or damage may result.The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during itshigh-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. Thischanges should be consistent with anticipated climate should be considered a normal part of the break-in andconditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-hicle”.
  • 97. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97SAFETY TIPS Exhaust GasTransporting Passengers WARNING!NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGOAREA. Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon 2 monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. WARNING! Breathing it can make you unconscious and can• Do not leave children or animals inside parked eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may follow these safety tips: cause serious injury or death. • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, confined areas any longer than needed to move inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people your vehicle in or out of the area. riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate injured or killed. open, make sure that all windows are closed and• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. belts. (Continued)• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
  • 98. 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The WARNING! (Continued) Vehicle • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling Seat Belts controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, blower at high speed. frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.The best protection against carbon monoxide entry intothe vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after asystem. collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding beltsystem, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the or retractor condition, replace the belt.vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle isdamaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- Air Bag Warning Lightplete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open The light should come on and remain on forseams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes four to eight seconds as a bulb check when theto seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light isinspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised not lit during starting, see your authorizedfor lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
  • 99. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while WARNING!driving, have the system checked by an authorizeddealer. Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per- 2Defroster sonal injury.Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place • Always make sure that floor mats are properlythe blower control on high speed. You should be able to attached to the floor mat fasteners.feel the air directed against the windshield. See your • Never place or install floor mats or other floorauthorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper- coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properlyable. secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-Floor Mat Safety Information ing with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on topvehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area of already installed floor mats. Additional floorunobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they mats and other coverings will reduce the size of thecannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals pedal area and interfere with the pedals.or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. (Continued)
  • 100. 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside WARNING! (Continued) The Vehicle• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have Tires been removed for cleaning. Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob- lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires control. (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.• If required, mounting posts must be properly in- stalled, if not equipped from the factory.Failure to properly follow floor mat installation ormounting can cause interference with the brakepedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss ofcontrol of the vehicle.
  • 101. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101Lights Fluid LeaksHave someone observe the operation of brake lights and Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasolinesignal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or 2panel. brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.Door LatchesCheck for positive closing, latching, and locking.
  • 102. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECONTENTSⅥ MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 3 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .114 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .110 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .114 ▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 ▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Ⅵ BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED . .115 ▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming ▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 ▫ Outside Mirrors Approach Light — Ⅵ Uconnect௡ (4.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ Uconnect௡ 4.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 ▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .112
  • 103. 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect௡ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 ▫ Uconnect௡ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Ⅵ VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .142 ▫ Uconnect௡ 8.4/8.4 Nav. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect௡ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 ▫ Uconnect௡ Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Ⅵ SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199Ⅵ Uconnect௡ Phone (8.4/8.4N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 ▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 ▫ Uconnect௡ 8.4/8.4 Nav. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 ▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .201 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 ▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ▫ Uconnect௡ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 ▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .171 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
  • 104. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 ▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 ▫ SmartBeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .221Ⅵ DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .213 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 ▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .214 ▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 3 ▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 ▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 (Available With Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . . .216 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Ⅵ TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .218 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Ⅵ LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 ▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .221 ▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with ▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
  • 105. 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Ambient Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Ⅵ HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Ⅵ ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .238Ⅵ WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .230 Ⅵ ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 ▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available with ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 ▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .233 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Ⅵ TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .234 Ⅵ ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —Ⅵ POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .246
  • 106. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .247 ▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . .264▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 ▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped. . . .266▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Ⅵ PARKSENSE௡ REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 ▫ ParkSense௡ Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 3▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 ▫ ParkSense௡ Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .269▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 ▫ ParkSense௡ Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 ▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense௡ . . . . . . . .273▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .253 ▫ Service The ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .256 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .258 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense௡ System . . . . . . . . . .274▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .260 ▫ ParkSense௡ System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .274▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
  • 107. 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEⅥ PARKVIEW௡ REAR BACK UP CAMERA — ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 ▫ Turning ParkView௡ On Or Off — ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 With Touch Screen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Ⅵ POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .291Ⅵ OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 ▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .292 ▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 ▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .292Ⅵ GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED. . . .281 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 ▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink௡. . .283 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 ▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .286 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .287 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 ▫ Using HomeLink௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
  • 108. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 ▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 ▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 ▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304Ⅵ ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .294 ▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped with 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304Ⅵ CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Ⅵ REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 3 ▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 ▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Ⅵ LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .307Ⅵ STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 ▫ Glovebox Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
  • 109. 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEMIRRORSInside Day/Night MirrorA single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It isa twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button witha counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools formounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should beadjusted to center on the view through the rear window.Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reducedby moving the small control under the mirror to the night Adjusting Rearview Mirrorposition (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirrorshould be adjusted while the small control under the Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equippedmirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse.
  • 110. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror. NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will 3 give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle. WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side Automatic Dimming Mirror convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your CAUTION! passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use yourTo avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never inside mirror when judging the size or distance of aspray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe themirror clean.
  • 111. 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEOutside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This LED shinesSome models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles. Ithinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to also shines downward to illuminate the area in front ofresist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full the doors.forward, full rearward and normal.Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If EquippedEquipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirrorThe driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for positioning which will aid the driver’s view of theglare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrorsby the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto- will move slightly downward from the present positionmatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outsidemirror adjusts. mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. EachOutside Mirrors Approach Light — If Equipped stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir-Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with rors in Reverse position.approach lighting contain one LED, which is located inthe upper outboard mirror glass corner. The approachlight supplies illuminated entry lighting, which turns on
  • 112. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113NOTE:• The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect௡ System. 3• Refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.Power MirrorsThe power mirror controls are located on the driver’sdoor trim panel. Power Mirror Control The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but- tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that you want to adjust. NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indi- cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
  • 113. 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEUsing the mirror control switch, press on any of the four swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns onarrows for the direction that you want the mirror to automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.move.Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled bythe optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “DriverMemory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of YourVehicle” for further information.Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rearwindow defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-ther information. Illuminated Vanity Mirror “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of SunIlluminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped VisorAn illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotateTo use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
  • 114. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPEDyour left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, tovisor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,visor and pull rearward. motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. 3 Slide-On-Rod Feature Rear Detection Zones
  • 115. 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEWhen the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lanemomentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zoneto let the driver know that the system is operational. The starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap-BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSMforward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode system monitors the detection zones on both sides of thewhen the vehicle is in PARK. vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. NOTE: • The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de- tection zones. • The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends BSM Warning Light
  • 116. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the Entering From The Side BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either time the vehicle is in a forward gear. side of the vehicle.The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors arelocated must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/roadcontamination so that the BSM system can function 3properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia wherethe radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in thedetection zones by illuminating the BSM warning lightlocated in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding anaudible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three Side Monitoringdifferent entry points (side, rear, front) while driving tosee if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue analert during these types of zone entries.
  • 117. 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEEntering From The Rear Overtaking TrafficVehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speedside and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains inspeed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate. Rear Monitoring Overtaking/Approaching
  • 118. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that arestationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle inberms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.on such objects. This is normal operation and yourvehicle does not require service. 3 Stationary Objects Overtaking/Passing
  • 119. 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy- clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Rear Cross Path Opposing Traffic The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
  • 120. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver. When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible 3 alarms, including reducing the radio volume. WARNING! RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a RCP Detection Zones parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful whenRCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of backing up, even when using RCP. Always checkthe vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, andthe vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maxi- vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-mum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury orparking lot situations. death.
  • 121. 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEModes Of Operation turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chimeThree selectable modes of operation are available in the will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-Uconnect௡ System. Refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in tected object are present on the same side at the same“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. Information. addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on) volume willBlind Spot Alert be reduced.When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate sideview mirror based on a detected object. However, when • Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSMthe system is operating in RCP, the system will respond system, the radio volume is reduced.with both visual and audible alerts when a detected • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will requestobject is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the appropriate visual alert only.the radio volume is reduced. When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond withBlind Spot Alert Lights/Chime both visual and audible alerts when a detected object isWhen operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radiothe BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; thepriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the RCP state always requests the chime.
  • 122. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123Blind Spot Alert Off Uconnectா (4.3)When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no Uconnectா 4.3visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP Uconnect௡ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-systems. vehicle communications system. Uconnect௡ Phone al-NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile 3mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle phone.is started, the previously stored mode will be recalled Uconnect௡ Phone supports the following features:and used. Voice Activated features:Astronomy Zone — System Temporarily Unavailable • Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smiths Mo-When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system bile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”),will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC willdisplay the message “ Blind spot system unavailable- • Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”),Astronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up • Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Calland stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone. Back”), • View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”, “Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show Recent Calls”),
  • 123. 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your Smith Mobile”). vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect௡ Phone.Screen Activated Features: For Uconnect௡ customer support, visit the following• Dialing via Keypad using touch-screen, website:• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis- • www.UconnectPhone.com played on the touch-screen, • or call 1–877–855–8400• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen, If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile you may not be able to use any Uconnect௡ Phone• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs, features. Refer to your mobile service provider or the• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth௡ Device via the phone manufacturer for details. touch-screen, Uconnect௡ Phone allows you to transfer calls between the• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your to connect to them quickly. vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation.
  • 124. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and WARNING! one audio device can be used with the system at a time. Any voice commanded system should be used only The system is available in English, Spanish, or French in safe driving conditions following all applicable languages. laws, including laws regarding phone use. All atten- Uconnect௡ Phone Button tion should be focused on safely operating the ve- 3 hicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision The Uconnect௡ Phone Button is used to get causing serious injury or death. into the phone mode and make calls, show recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phone-The Uconnect௡ Phone is driven through your Bluetooth௡ book etc., When you press the button you will“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect௡ features hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.Bluetooth௡ technology - the global standard that enablesdifferent electronic devices to connect to each other Uconnect௡ Voice Command Buttonwithout wires or a docking station, so Uconnect௡ Phone The Uconnect௡ Voice Command Button isworks no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be only used for “barge in” and when you areit your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone already in a call and you want to send Tones oris turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s make another call.Uconnect௡ Phone. The Uconnect௡ Phone allows up to tenmobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the The Uconnect௡ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi- cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect௡ Phone
  • 125. 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEcan be adjusted either from the radio volume control • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for theknob or from the steering wheel radio control (right beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or anotherswitch), if so equipped. prompt.Operation • For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and thenVoice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect௡ “John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com-Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect௡ Phone pound command can be said: “Call John Smithmenu structure. Voice commands are required after most mobile”.Uconnect௡ Phone prompts. There are two general meth-ods for how Voice Command works: • For each feature explanation in this section, only the compound command form of the voice command is1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo- given. You can also break the commands into parts and bile”. say each part of the command when you are asked for2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to it. For example, you can use the compound command guide you to complete the task. form voice command “Search for John Smith”, or youYou will be prompted for a specific command and then can break the compound command form into twoguided through the available options. voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked “John Smith”. Please remember, the Uconnect௡ Phone
  • 126. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 works best when you talk in a normal conversational do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/ requested but the specific name was not recognized. meters away from you. The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the systemNatural Speech requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressingYour Uconnect௡ Phone Voice system uses a Natural 3Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine. the Voice Command button. Voice Command TreeNatural speech allows the user to speak commands inphrases or complete sentences. The system filters out Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” Help Commandand “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “Iwould like to”. If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say “Help” followingThe system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase the beep.or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to KellySmith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- To activate the Uconnect௡ Phone from idle, simply presstence, the system identifies the topic or context and the button and say a command or say “help”. Allprovides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who Uconnect௡ Phone sessions begin with a press of the button on the radio control head.
  • 127. 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECancel Command NOTE:At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and • You must have Bluetooth௡ enabled on your phone toyou will be returned to the main menu. complete this procedure.You can also press the or buttons when the • The vehicle must be in PARK.system is listening for a command and be returned to the 1. You can do either of the following:main or previous menu. a. Press the “Settings” hard-key, Page down to theNOTE: Pressing the or buttons while the system “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key, press it and you willis playing is known as “Barging In”, refer to “Barge In — see the “Paired Phones” screen. If there are noOverriding Prompts” for further information. paired phones you will see <Empty> as the firstPair (Link) Uconnect௡ Phone To A Mobile Phone device name.To begin using your Uconnect௡ Phone, you must pair b. Press the MORE hard-key, then press the Phoneyour compatible Bluetooth௡ enabled mobile phone. soft-key and you will go to the Uconnect௡ PhoneTo complete the pairing process, you will need to refer- main screen. Press the “Settings” soft-key. If thereence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The are no phones currently paired a pop-up willUconnect௡ website may also provide detailed instruc- appear. If you select “Yes” you will go the “Pairedtions for pairing. Phones” screen, if you select “No” you will return to the Uconnect௡ Phone main menu.
  • 128. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1292. At the “Paired Phones” screen press the “Add Device” • Search for available devices on your Bluetooth௡ en- soft-key and a pop-up with instructions will appear. abled Audio Device. When prompted on the device, select the “Uconnect௡” device and enter the PIN,3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth௡ en- abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, • Uconnect௡ Phone will display an in process screen select the “Uconnect௡” device and enter the PIN. while the system is connecting, 34. When the pairing process has successfully completed, • When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take this device the highest priority. This device will take precedence over other paired phones within range. precedence over other paired devices within range.Pair A Bluetooth௡ Streaming Audio Device NOTE: If No is selected, device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired• Touch the “Player” hard-key to begin, will have the higher priority.• Press the “Source” soft-key, You can also use the following VR command to bring up• Change the Source to Bluetooth௡, a list of paired audio devices.• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key, • “Show Paired Audio Devices”
  • 129. 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEConnecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio DeviceAudio Device • Touch the “Settings” hard-key,Uconnect௡ Phone will automatically connect to the high-est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within • Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key,range. If you would need to choose a particular Phone or • Select the Phone or Audio Device,Audio Device follow these steps: • At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Disconnect• Touch the “Settings” hard-key, Device” soft-key,• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key, • Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.• Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Phone/ Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device Audio” soft-key and then an Audio Device, • Touch the “Settings” hard-key,• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Connect • Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key, Device” soft-key, • Select the Phone or Audio Device,• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen. • At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Delete De- vice” soft-key, • Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
  • 130. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite phonebook. Specific Bluetooth௡ Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect௡• Touch the “Settings” hard-key, website for supported phones.• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key, • To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook,• Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name” currently connected device, section. 3• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Make Favor- • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins ite” soft-key; you will see the chosen device move to as soon as the Bluetooth௡ wireless phone connection is the top of the list, made to the Uconnect௡ Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle.• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen. • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook loaded and updated every time a phone is connectedTransfer From Mobile Phone to the Uconnect௡ Phone.If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,Uconnect௡ Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries down- loaded, there may be a short delay before the latestnames) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
  • 131. 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail- • Touch the “911/Help” soft-key. Touch the appropriate able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- listing to alter, Emergency for example, able for use. • Once Emergency is touched, the Edit soft-key appears.• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile Touch the “Edit” soft-key and you will be given the phone is accessible. choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default,• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or • Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the task. deleted on the Uconnect௡ Phone. These can only be Phone Call Features edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans- ferred and updated to Uconnect௡ Phone on the next The following features can be accessed through the phone connection. Uconnect௡ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile serviceEmergency And Towing Assistance plan provides three-way calling, this feature can beThe 911/Help numbers can only be altered. These can not accessed through the Uconnect௡ Phone. Check with yourbe deleted or the names can not be changed. mobile service provider for the features that you have.To change the 911/Help number follow these steps. Ways To Initiate A Phone Call• Touch the “phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call screen, with Uconnect௡ Phone.
  • 132. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133• Redial, Call By Saying A Phonebook Name• Dial by touching in the number, • Press the button to begin,• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Number, Call by • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back), say “Call John Doe Mobile”,• Mobile Phonebook, • The Uconnect௡ Phone will dial the number associated 3 with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will• Recent Call Log. ask which number you want to call for John Doe.NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be Call Controlsdone with 1 call or less active. The touch-screen allows you to control the following callDial By Saying A Number features:• Press the button to begin, • Answer• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, • End say “Dial 248-555-1212”, • Ignore• The Uconnect௡ Phone will dial 248-555-1212. • Hold/unhold
  • 133. 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Mute/unmute Recent Calls• Transfer the call to/from the phone You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types:• Swap 2 active calls • Incoming Calls• Join 2 active calls together • Outgoing CallsTouch-Tone Number Entry • Missed Calls• Touch the “Phone” soft-key, • All Calls• Touch the “Dial” soft-key, These can be accessed by touching the recent calls• The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed, soft-key on the Phone main screen.• Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and You can also press the button and say “Show my touch “Call”. incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming callsTo send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press will be displayed.the button while in a call and say “1234#” or you NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail pass- “Recent” or “Missed”.word is stored in your mobile phonebook.
  • 134. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call NOTE: The Uconnect௡ Phone compatible phones in theCurrently In Progress market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user canWhen you receive a call on your mobile phone, the only answer an incoming call or ignore it.Uconnect௡ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,if on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer or Making A Second Call While Current Call Is InIgnore. Press the Answer soft-key or the button on the Progress 3steering wheel to accept the call. To make a second call while you are currently on a call,Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followedCurrently In Progress by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish toIf a call is currently in progress and you have another call. The first call will be on hold while the second call isincoming call, you will hear the same network tones for in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touchingcall waiting that you normally hear when using your the “Hold” soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dialmobile phone. Uconnect௡ Phone will then interrupt the a number from the dialpad, recent calls or from thevehicle audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Togglingshowing Answer, Ignore or Transfer. Press the button Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, referto place the current call on hold and answer the incoming to “Join Calls” in this section.call.
  • 135. 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEToggling Between Calls the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on hold may not become active automati-If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), cally. This is cell phone-dependent.press the button until you hear a single beep, indicat-ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have Redialswitched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time. • Press the “Redial” soft-key,Also you can press the Swap soft-key on the Phone mainscreen. • or press the button and after the “Listening”Join Calls prompt and the following beep, say “Redial”,When two calls are in progress (one active and one on • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main say “Redial”,screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call. • The Uconnect௡ Phone will call the last number thatCall Termination was dialed from your mobile phone.To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End Call Continuationsoft-key or the button. Only the active call(s) will be Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on theterminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become Uconnect௡ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF.
  • 136. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, continue on the Uconnect௡ Phone either until the call say “Emergency” and the Uconnect௡ Phone will in- ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates struct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency cessation of the call on the Uconnect௡ Phone and number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, transfer of the call to the mobile phone. and Mexico.Uconnectா Phone Features NOTE: 3Emergency Assistance • The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. andIf you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed mayreachable: not be applicable with the available mobile service and• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency area. number for your area. • The Uconnect௡ Phone does slightly lower yourIf the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect௡ Phone is chances of successfully making a phone call as to thatoperational, you may reach the emergency number as for the mobile phone directly.follows:• Press the button to begin,
  • 137. 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: WARNING! • The towing assistance number dialed is based on the Your phone must be turned on and connected to the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528- Uconnect௡ Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature 2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14- in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has 3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside network coverage and stays connected to the Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler Uconnect௡ Phone. Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverageRoadside Assistance details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24–Hour Roadside Assistance Card.If you need roadside assistance: Voice Mail Calling• Press the button to begin, To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, with Automated Systems”. say “Roadside Assistance”. Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.
  • 138. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139You can use your Uconnect௡ Phone to access a voice mail You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries assystem or an automated service, such as a paging service tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pageror automated customer service line. Some services re- entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone-quire immediate response selection. In some instances, book entry and/or Last Name as “Voice Password”, thenthat may be too quick for use of the Uconnect௡ Phone. if you press the button and say “Send Voicemail Password”, the Uconnect௡ Phone will then send the 3When calling a number with your Uconnect௡ Phone that corresponding phone number associated with the phone-normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence book entry, as tones over the phone.on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize thetouch-screen or press the button and say the word NOTE:“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example, • The first number encountered for that contact will beif required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be4 6 #), you can press the button and say, “Send 3 7 4 ignored.6 #”. Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence ofnumbers, is also to be used for navigating through an • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phoneautomated customer service center menu structure, and network configurations. This is normal.to leave a number on a pager. • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature.
  • 139. 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by • Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to Voice some phones are not supported over Bluetooth௡. Response Length, These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing • Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box a numbered sequence. next to the selection. A check-mark will appear toBarge In — Overriding Prompts show your selection.The button can be used when you wish to skip part Phone And Network Status Indicatorsof a prompt and issue your voice command immediately. Uconnect௡ Phone will provide notification to inform youFor example, if a prompt is asking “There are 2 numbers of your phone and network status when you are attempt-with the name John. Say the full name” you could press ing to make a phone call using Uconnect௡ Phone. Thethe button and say, “John Smith” to select that status is given for roaming, network signal strength andoption without having to listen to the rest of the voice phone battery strength.prompt.Voice Response LengthIt is possible for you to choose between Brief andDetailed Voice Response Length.• Touch the “More” hard-key, then touch the “Settings” soft-key,
  • 140. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect௡ Phone to play it on the vehicle WARNING! audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort that the call did not go through even though the call is in and convenience of you and your passengers. Some progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the of these should not be used when driving because 3 audio. they take your eyes from the road or your attention from driving. Never dial using the mobile phone Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF) keypad while driving. When you mute the Uconnect௡ Phone, you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the otherYou can dial a phone number with your mobile phone party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. Inkeypad and still use the Uconnect௡ Phone (while dialing order to mute the Uconnect௡ Phone simply touch thevia the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise “Mute” button on the Phone main screen.caution and take precautionary safety measures). Bydialing a number with your paired Bluetooth௡ mobilephone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’saudio system. The Uconnect௡ Phone will work the sameas if you dial the number using voice a command.
  • 141. 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEAdvanced Phone Connectivity Things You Should Know About Your Uconnectா PhoneTransfer Call To And From Mobile PhoneThe Uconnect௡ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- Voice Commandferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect௡ Phone • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror towithout terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overheadfrom your paired mobile phone to the Uconnect௡ Phone console (if equipped) and the mirror.or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone • Always wait for the beep before speaking.main screen.Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you wouldUconnect௡ Phone And Mobile Phone speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you.If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth௡connection between a Uconnect௡ Phone paired mobilephone and the Uconnect௡ Phone, follow the instructionsdescribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
  • 142. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking • When navigating through an automated system such during a Voice Command period. as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.• Performance is maximized under: • low-to-medium blower setting, • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is • low-to-medium vehicle speed, not in motion is recommended. 3 • low road noise, • It is not recommended to store similar sounding names • smooth road surface, in the Uconnect௡ Phonebook. • fully closed windows, • Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect௡ Phone Lo- • dry weather condition. cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar.• Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- cents, the system may not always work for some.
  • 143. 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must • low road noise, be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”. • smooth road surface,• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). • fully closed windows, • dry weather conditions, and• Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing • operation from the driver’s seat. number combinations may not be supported. • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and compromised with the convertible top down. not the Uconnect௡ Phone.Far End Audio Performance • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.• Audio quality is maximized under: • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • low-to-medium blower setting, compromised with the convertible top down. • low-to-medium vehicle speed,
  • 144. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145Bluetooth௡ Communication Link Power-UpMobile phones have been found to lose connection to the After switching the ignition key from OFF to either theUconnect௡ Phone. When this happens, the connection ON or ACC position, or after a language change, youcan generally be reestablished by switching the phone must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain inBluetooth௡ ON mode. 3
  • 145. 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEVoice Tree
  • 146. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147NOTE: • If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth than these com-• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your mands will return a response that the contact does not mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send exist in the phonebook. a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to • Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and for John Smith. underlined in the gray shaded boxes. 3• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or General Information “Other”. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the Calls” or “Missed Calls”. following conditions:• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect sys- • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by tem is equipped with this feature and the mobile the party responsible for compliance could void the phone supports messaging over Bluetooth. user’s authority to operate the equipment.• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone • This device may not cause harmful interference. number supported by your Mobile phone. • This device must accept any interference received,• You can replace “4” with any message number shown including interference that may cause undesired op- on the screen. eration.
  • 147. 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEUconnectா Phone (8.4/8.4N) • Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call Back”).Uconnectா 8.4/8.4 NavUconnect௡ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- • View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”,vehicle communications system. Uconnect௡ Phone al- “Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show Recent Calls”).lows you to dial a phone number with your mobilephone. • Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for JohnUconnect௡ Phone supports the following features: Smith Mobile”).Voice Activated Features: Screen Activated Features• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith’s • Dialing via Keypad using touch-screen. Mobile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”). • Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming played on the touch-screen. SMS messages. • Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John easily accessible on the Main Phone screen. Smith’s Mobile”). • Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”). • Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
  • 148. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149• Sending a text message via the touch-screen. vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation.• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth௡ Device via the touch-screen. WARNING!• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly. Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable 3NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging laws, including laws regarding phone use. All atten-via Bluetooth௡ for messaging features to work properly. tion should be focused on safely operating the ve-Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your hicle. Failure to do so may result in an accidentvehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically causing serious injury or death.mute your radio when using the Uconnect௡ Phone. The Uconnect௡ Phone is driven through your Bluetooth௡For Uconnect௡ customer support, visit the following “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect௡ featureswebsite: Bluetooth௡ technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other• www.UconnectPhone.com without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect௡ Phone• or call 1–877–855–8400 works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (beUconnect௡ Phone allows you to transfer calls between the it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phonesystem and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
  • 149. 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEUconnect௡ Phone. The Uconnect௡ Phone allows up to ten The button is also used to access the Voice Com-mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the mands for the Uconnect௡ Voice Command features ifsystem. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect௡ Voiceone audio device can be used with the system at a time. Command section for direction on how to use theThe system is available in English, Spanish, or French button.languages. The Uconnect௡ Phone is fully integrated with the vehiclesUconnect௡ Phone Button audio system. The volume of the Uconnect௡ Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or The Uconnect௡ Phone Button is used to get from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so into the phone mode and make calls, show equipped. recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phone- book etc., When you press the button you will Operationhear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command. Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect௡Uconnect௡ Voice Command Button Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect௡ Phone menu structure. Voice commands are required after most The Uconnect௡ Voice Command Button is Uconnect௡ Phone prompts. There are two general meth- only used for “barge in” and when you are ods for how Voice Command works: already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call. 1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo- bile”.
  • 150. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1512. Say the individual commands and allow the system to it. For example, you can use the compound command guide you to complete the task. form voice command “Search for John Smith”, or you can break the compound command form into twoYou will be prompted for a specific command and then voice commands: “Search Contact” and when askedguided through the available options. “John Smith”. Please remember, the Uconnect௡ Phone• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the works best when you talk in a normal conversational 3 beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/ prompt. meters away from you.• For certain operations, compound commands can be Natural Speech used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then Your Uconnect௡ Phone Voice system uses a Natural “John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com- Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine. pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile”. Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out• For each feature explanation in this section, only the certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” compound command form of the voice command is and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I given. You can also break the commands into parts and would like to”. say each part of the command when you are asked for
  • 151. 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase To activate the Uconnect௡ Phone from idle, simply pressor sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly the button and say a command or say “help”. AllSmith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- Uconnect௡ Phone sessions begin with a press of thetence, the system identifies the topic or context and button on the radio control head.provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who Cancel Commanddo you want to call?” in the case where a phone call wasrequested but the specific name was not recognized. At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and you will be returned to the main menu.The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the systemrequires more information from the user it will ask a You can also press the or buttons when thequestion to which the user can respond without pressing system is listening for a command and be returned to thethe Voice Command button. main or previous menu.Voice Command Tree NOTE: Pressing the or buttons while the system is playing is known as “Barging In”, refer to “Barge In —Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. Overriding Prompts” for further information.Help Command Pair (Link) Uconnect௡ Phone To A Mobile PhoneIf you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to To begin using your Uconnect௡ Phone, you must pairknow your options at any prompt, say “Help” following your compatible Bluetooth௡ enabled mobile phone.the beep.
  • 152. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. TheUconnect௡ website may also provide detailed instruc-tions for pairing.NOTE: 3• You must have Bluetooth௡ enabled on your phone to complete this procedure.• The vehicle must be in PARK.1. Press the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.2. If there is no phone currently connected with the 3. Select Yes to begin the pairing process. Then, search system, a pop-up will appear. for available devices on your Bluetooth௡ enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect௡ screen. • If No is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key from the Uconnect௡ Phone main screen, • Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
  • 153. 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Search for available devices on your Bluetooth௡ 5. When the pairing process has successfully completed, enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the the system will prompt you to choose whether or not phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make Uconnect௡ screen, this phone the highest priority. This phone will take • See Step 4 to complete the process. precedence over other paired phones within range.4. Uconnect௡ Phone will display an in progress screen Pair Additional Mobile Phones while the system is connecting. • Touch the “Settings” soft-key from the Phone main screen, • Next, touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key, • Touch the “Add Device” soft-key, • Search for available devices on your Bluetooth௡ en- abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect௡ screen, • Uconnect௡ Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting,
  • 154. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155• When the pairing process has successfully completed, NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the the system will prompt you to choose whether or not phone priority is determined by the order in which it was this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher phone the highest priority. This phone will take pre- priority. cedence over other paired phones within range. You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio: 3 • “Show Paired Phones” or • “Connect My Phone” Pair A Bluetooth௡ Streaming Audio Device • Touch the “Player” or “Media” soft-key to begin, • Change the Source to Bluetooth௡, • Touch the “Bluetooth௡” soft-key to display the Paired Audio Devices screen, • Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
  • 155. 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the You can also use the following VR command to bring upsystem, a pop-up will appear. a list of paired audio devices.• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth௡ en- • “Show Paired Audio Devices” abled audio device. When prompted on the device, Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect௡ Audio Device screen, Uconnect௡ Phone will automatically connect to the high-• Uconnect௡ Phone will display an in process screen est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within while the system is connecting, range. If you would need to choose a particular phone or• When the pairing process has successfully completed, Audio Device follow these steps: the system will prompt you to choose whether or not • Touch the “Settings” soft-key, this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority. This device will take • Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key, precedence over other paired devices within range. • Touch to select the particular Phone or the “PairedNOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the Audio Sources” soft-key and then an Audio Device,device priority is determined by the order in which it was • Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.paired. The latest device paired will have the higherpriority.
  • 156. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device • The options pop-up will be displayed,• Touch the “Settings” soft-key, • Touch the “Delete Device” soft-key,• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key, • Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite name, 3 • Touch the “Settings” soft-key,• The options pop-up will be displayed, • Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth௡” soft-key,• Touch the “Disconnect Device” soft-key, • Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen. name,Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device • The options pop-up will be displayed,• Touch the “Settings” soft-key, • Touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list,• Touch the Phone/Bluetooth௡ soft-key, • Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the currently connected device,
  • 157. 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPhonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-Transfer From Mobile Phone loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect௡ Phone.If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,Uconnect௡ Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries down-names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s loaded, there may be a short delay before the latestphonebook. Specific Bluetooth௡ Phones with Phone Book downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect௡ able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-website for supported phones. able for use.• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook, • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name” phone is accessible. section. • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins deleted on the Uconnect௡ Phone. These can only be as soon as the Bluetooth௡ wireless phone connection is edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans- made to the Uconnect௡ Phone, for example, after you ferred and updated to Uconnect௡ Phone on the next start the vehicle. phone connection.
  • 158. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159Managing Your Favorite PhonebookThere are three ways you can add an entry to yourFavorite Phonebook.1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite, touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the 3 phone main screen.2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select phone- book from the Phone main screen, then select the appropriate number. Touch the + next to the selected number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up select “Add to Favorites”. NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an existing favorite. 3. From the Phone main screen, select phonebook. From the phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key and then select the + soft-key located to the right of the phonebook record. Select an empty entry and touch the + on that selected entry. When the Options pop-up
  • 159. 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE appears, touch “Add from Mobile”. You will then be • Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and asked which contact and number to choose from your then touch the + Options soft-key. mobile phonebook. When complete the new favorite • Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to will be shown. remove.To Remove A Favorite • The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from• To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the Favs”. Phone main screen.
  • 160. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161Emergency And Towing AssistanceThe Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can onlybe altered. These cannot be deleted and the names cannotbe changed.To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these 3steps.• Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main screen.• Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Next scroll to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Favorites. • The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose between Editing the number or resetting the number• Touch the + Options soft-key. to default.• Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be Phone Call Features altered. The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect௡ Phone if the feature(s) are available and supported by Bluetooth௡ on your mobile service plan.
  • 161. 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEFor example, if your mobile service plan provides three- NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can beway calling, this feature can be accessed through the done with 1 call or less active.Uconnect௡ Phone. Check with your mobile service pro- Dial By Saying A Numbervider for the features that you have. • Press the button to begin,Ways To Initiate A Phone CallListed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,with Uconnect௡ Phone. say “Dial 248-555-1212”,• Redial • The Uconnect௡ Phone will dial the number 248-555- 1212.• Dial by touching in the number Call By Saying A Phonebook Name• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by • Press the button to begin, Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back) • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,• Favorite Phonebook say “Call John Doe Mobile”,• Mobile Phonebook • The Uconnect௡ Phone will dial the number associated• Recent Call Log with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe.• SMS Message Viewer
  • 162. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163Call Controls Touch-Tone Number EntryThe touch-screen allows you to control the following call • Touch the “Phone” soft-key,features: • Touch the “Dial” soft-key,• Answer • The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed,• End 3 • Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and• Ignore touch “Call”.• Hold/unhold To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press the button while in a call and say “Send 1234#” or• Mute/unmute you can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail• Transfer the call to/from the phone password is stored in your mobile phonebook.• Swap 2 active calls• Join 2 active calls together
  • 163. 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLERecent Calls • All CallsYou may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls”following call types: soft-key on the Phone main screen. You can also press the button and say “Show my incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed. You can also press the button and say “Show my recent calls” from any screen and the All calls screen will be displayed. NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”, “Recent” or “Missed”. Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call Currently In Progress• Incoming Calls When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the• Outgoing Calls Uconnect௡ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call.• Missed Calls
  • 164. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165Press the button to accept the call. To ignore the call, Making A Second Call While Current Call Is Intouch the “Ignore” soft-key on the touch-screen. You can Progressalso touch the “answer” soft-key or touch the caller ID To make a second call while you are currently on a call,box. press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followedAnswer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish toCurrently In Progress call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is 3 in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touchingIf a call is currently in progress and you have another the Hold soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial aincoming call, you will hear the same network tones for number from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or fromcall waiting that you normally hear when using your the phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer tomobile phone. Press the phone button, answer soft- “Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To combine twokey or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and calls, refer to “Join Calls” in this section.answer the incoming call. Place/Retrieve A Call From HoldNOTE: The Uconnect௡ Phone compatible phones in themarket today do not support rejecting an incoming call During an active call, touch the “Hold” soft-key on thewhen another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can Phone main screen.only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
  • 165. 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEToggling Between Calls RedialIf two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), • Press the “Redial” soft-key,touch the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone main screen. • or press the and after the “Listening” prompt andOnly one call can be placed on hold at a time. the following beep, say “Redial”,You can also press the button to toggle between theactive and held phone call. • After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, say “Redial”,Join Calls • The Uconnect௡ Phone will call the last number thatWhen two calls are in progress (one active and one on was dialed from your mobile phone.hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone mainscreen to combine all calls into a Conference Call. Call ContinuationCall Termination Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect௡ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has beenTo end a call in progress, momentarily press the but- switched to OFF.ton or the end soft-key. Only the active call(s) will beterminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audiothe new active call. If the active call is terminated by the system until the phone becomes out of range for thefar end, a call on hold may not become active automati- Bluetooth௡ connection. It is recommended to press thecally. This is cell phone-dependent. “transfer” soft-key when leaving the vehicle.
  • 166. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167Uconnectா Phone Features NOTE:Emergency Assistance • The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the touch-screen.If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone isreachable: • The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and 3• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may number for your area. not be applicable with the available mobile service andIf the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect௡ Phone is area.operational, you may reach the emergency number as • The Uconnect௡ Phone does slightly lower yourfollows: chances of successfully making a phone call as to that• Press the button to begin. for the mobile phone directly.• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, say “Call Emergency” or “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect௡ Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.
  • 167. 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the WARNING! country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528- Your phone must be turned on and connected to the 2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14- Uconnect௡ Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature 3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler network coverage and stays connected to the Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage Uconnect௡ Phone. details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24–Hour Roadside Assistance Card.Roadside Assistance Voice Mail CallingIf you need roadside assistance: To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working• Press the button to begin. with Automated Systems”.• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, Working With Automated Systems say “Roadside Assistance”. This method is used in instances where one generally hasNOTE: to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.• The roadside assistance call may also be initiated by touch. You can use your Uconnect௡ Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service, such as a paging service
  • 168. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169or automated customer service line. Some services re- Password”, then if you press the button and sayquire immediate response selection. In some instances, “Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect௡ Phone willthat may be too quick for use of the Uconnect௡ Phone. then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.When calling a number with your Uconnect௡ Phone thatnormally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence NOTE:on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the 3 • The first number encountered for that contact will betouch-screen or press the button and say the word sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For example, ignored.if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 74 6 #), you can press the button and say, “Send 3 7 4 • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone6 #”. Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of network configurations. This is normal.numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an • Some paging and voice mail systems have system timeautomated customer service center menu structure, and out settings that are too short and may not allow theto leave a number on a pager. use of this feature.You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as • Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported bytones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager some phones are not supported over Bluetooth௡.entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone- These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialingbook entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail a numbered sequence.
  • 169. 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEBarge In — Overriding Prompts • Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box next to the selection. A check-mark will appear toThe button can be used when you wish to skip part show your selection.of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.For example, if a prompt is asking “There are 2 numbers Phone And Network Status Indicatorswith the name John. Say the full name” you could press Uconnect௡ Phone will provide notification to inform youthe button and say, “John Smith” to select that of your phone and network status when you are attempt-option without having to listen to the rest of the voice ing to make a phone call using Uconnect௡ Phone. Theprompt. status is given for network signal strength and phoneVoice Response Length battery strength.It is possible for you to choose between Brief andDetailed Voice Response Length.• Touch the “More” soft-key (where available), then touch the “Settings” soft-key,• Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to Voice Response Length,
  • 170. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect௡ Phone to play it on the vehicle WARNING! audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort that the call did not go through even though the call is in and convenience of you and your passengers. Some progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the of these should not be used when driving because 3 audio. they take your eyes from the road or your attention from driving. Never dial using the mobile phone Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF) keypad while driving. When you mute the Uconnect௡ Phone, you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the otherYou can dial a phone number with your mobile phone party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. Inkeypad and still use the Uconnect௡ Phone (while dialing order to mute the Uconnect௡ Phone simply touch thevia the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise Mute button on the Phone main screen.caution and take precautionary safety measures). Bydialing a number with your paired Bluetooth௡ mobile Advanced Phone Connectivityphone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phoneaudio system. The Uconnect௡ Phone will work the sameas if you dial the number using voice a command. The Uconnect௡ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect௡ Phone
  • 171. 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEwithout terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call • Always wait for the beep before speaking.from your paired mobile phone to the Uconnect௡ Phone • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you wouldor vice versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away frommain screen. you.Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The • Make sure that no one other than you is speakingUconnect௡ Phone And Mobile Phone during a voice command period.If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth௡ • Performance is maximized under:connection between a Uconnect௡ Phone paired mobilephone and the Uconnect௡ Phone, follow the instructions • low-to-medium blower setting,described in your mobile phone User’s Manual. • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • low road noise,Things You Should Know About Your UconnectாPhone • smooth road surface, • fully closed windows,Voice Command • dry weather condition.• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead • Even though the system is designed for users speaking console (if equipped) and the mirror. in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- cents, the system may not always work for some.
  • 172. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173• When navigating through an automated system such Far End Audio Performance as voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking • Audio quality is maximized under: the digit string, make sure to say “Send”. • low-to-medium blower setting,• It is recommended that you do not store names in your • low-to-medium vehicle speed, favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion. • low road noise, 3• Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition • smooth road surface, rate is optimized when the entries are not similar. • fully closed windows,• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). • dry weather conditions, and• Even though international dialing for most number • operation from the driver’s seat. combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness number combinations may not be supported. to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be not the Uconnect௡ Phone. compromised with the convertible top down. • Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.
  • 173. 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLESMSUconnect௡ Phone can read or send new messages onyour phone.Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth௡ in orderto use this feature. If the Uconnect௡ Phone determinesyour phone is not compatible with SMS messaging overBluetooth௡ the “Messaging” button will be greyed outand the feature will not be available for use.NOTE: Uconnect௡ Phone SMS is only available whenthe vehicle is not in moving.
  • 174. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175Read Messages: Once a message is received and viewed or listened to, you will have the following options:If you receive a new text message while your phone isconnected to Uconnect௡ Phone, an announcement will be • Send a Replymade to notify you that you have a new text message. • Forward • Call 3
  • 175. 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLESend Messages Using Soft-Keys:You can send messages using Uconnect௡ Phone. To senda new message:• Touch the “Phone” soft-key,• Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message”,• Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person you wish to send the message to,• If multiple numbers are available for the contact select which number you would like to have the message sent,• Press “Send” or “Cancel”.
  • 176. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177Send Messages Using Voice Commands:• Press the button,• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, say “Send message to John Smith mobile”,• After the system prompts you for what message you 3 want to send, say the message you wish to send or say “List”. There are 18 preset messages.While the list of defined messages are being read, you caninterrupt the system by pressing the button andsaying the message you want to send.After the system confirms that you want to send yourmessage to John Smith, your message will be sent.
  • 177. 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEList of Preset Messages: 10. I will be <number> minutes late.1. Yes. 11. See you in <number> minutes.2. No. 12. Stuck in traffic.3. Okay. 13. Start without me.4. I can’t talk right now. 14. Where are you?5. Call me. 15. Are you there yet?6. I’ll call you later. 16. I need directions.7. I’m on my way. 17. I’m lost.8. Thanks. 18. See you later.9. I’ll be late.
  • 178. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179Bluetooth௡ Communication Link Power-UpMobile phones have been found to lose connection to the After switching the ignition key from OFF to either theUconnect௡ Phone. When this happens, the connection ON or ACC position, or after a language change, youcan generally be reestablished by switching the phone must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remainin Bluetooth௡ ON mode. 3
  • 179. 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEVoice Tree
  • 180. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181NOTE: • Send dial tones for automated systems is available while a call is active. This is an example that uses a• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.” mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you • Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but only which phone number you want to send a message to the first number encountered in a contact name will be for John Smith. sent. For example if there is a number stored in the 3 Home and Work numbers for the contact “Voicemail• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or password” only the Home number will be sent “Other”. • If your phone does not support phonebook download• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing or call log download over Bluetooth than these com- Calls” or “Missed Calls”. mands will return a response that the contact does not• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone exist in the phonebook. number supported by your Mobile phone. • Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have• These commands can be used during a phone call after been pre-loaded in the phonebooks. Commands such as pushing the Uconnect௡ Voice Command button on the “Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assistance” will call steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted the corresponding number stored with those contacts. while the VR session is active. NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
  • 181. 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
  • 182. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183NOTE: • Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect sys- tem is equipped with this feature and the mobile• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your phone supports messaging over Bluetooth. mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you • You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone which phone number you want to send a message to number supported by your Mobile phone. for John Smith. 3 • You can replace “4” with any message number shown• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or on the screen. “Other”. • If your phone does not support phonebook download• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing or call log download over Bluetooth than these com- Calls” or “Missed Calls”. mands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook.
  • 183. 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
  • 184. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold VOICE COMMANDface and underlined in the gray shaded boxes. Uconnectா 8.4/8.4 NavGeneral InformationThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and The Uconnect௡ Voice Command system allowsRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite 3following conditions: radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod and Sirius Travel Link.• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command user’s authority to operate the equipment. system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice Command system to recognize user voice• This device may not cause harmful interference. commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking• This device must accept any interference received, or a raised voice level. including interference that may cause undesired op- eration.
  • 185. 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If a command is not spoken a second time, the system WARNING! will respond with an error and give some direction as Any voice commanded system should be used only what can be said based on the context you are in. After in safe driving conditions following all applicable three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR laws. All attention should be focused on safely session with end. operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a Pressing the Uconnect௡ Voice Command button collision causing serious injury or death. while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”When you press the Uconnect௡ Voice Command The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal can say a command. This will become helpful once youto give a command. start to learn the options.If no command is spoken the system will say one of two NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” orresponses: “Help”.• I didn’t understand• I didn’t get that, etc.,
  • 186. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187These commands are universal and can be used from any Natural Speechmenu. All other commands can be used depending upon Natural speech allows the user to speak commands inthe active application. phrases or complete sentences. The system filters outWhen using this system, you should speak clearly and at certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”a normal speaking volume. and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “IThe system will best recognize your speech if the win- would like to”. 3dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is The system handles multiple inputs in the same phraseset to low. or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to KellyAt any point, if the system does not recognize one of your Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-commands, you will be prompted to repeat it. tence, the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “WhoTo hear available commands, press the Uconnect௡ Voice do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call wasCommand button and say “Help”. You will hear requested but the specific name was not recognized.available commands for the screen displayed. The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Uconnect௡ Voice Command button.
  • 187. 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEUconnectா Voice Commands Changing the VolumeThe Uconnect௡ Voice Command system understands two 1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Commandtypes of commands. Universal commands are available at button.all times. Local commands are available if the supported 2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).radio mode is active.Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect௡ Voice Com- 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust themand button. volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com- mand system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system.
  • 188. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session in DiscRadio/Player Modes To switch to the disc mode, say “Change source to Disc”.In this mode, you can say the following commands: This command can be given in any mode or screen:NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when • “Track” (#) (to change the track)a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect௡ Voice 3Command button.
  • 189. 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEVoice Tree
  • 190. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191NOTE: 3. You can replace “8” with any other satellite station named received by the radio.1. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM frequency, such as “98.7 FM”. 4. You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music types.2. You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite station name received by the radio. NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold 3 face and shaded grey.
  • 191. 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
  • 192. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193NOTE: 3. Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only available when the iPod is connected and playing.1. You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist, podcast and audio book names with any correspond- 4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are ing names on the current device that is playing. based on the music database provided by Gracenote.2. You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold 3 currently playing. Command is only available when face and shaded grey. CD is playing.
  • 193. 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
  • 194. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195NOTE: 3. You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or1. You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the “Show ski info” to get other forecasts. sports league screen. For example you can say “Show MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines”. NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey.2. You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items 3 shown on a league screen. For example you can say “Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball Teams”.
  • 195. 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
  • 196. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197NOTE: 3. Navigation commands only work if equipped with Navigation.1. Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles. NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold2. You can replace “Player” with “Radio”, “Navigation”, face and shaded grey. “Phone”, “Climate”, “More” or “Settings”. 3
  • 197. 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
  • 198. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199NOTE: WARNING!1. You can also say “Find City”, “Find Favorite”, “Find Play by Category”, “Find Play by Name”, “Find • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or Recently Found”, “Where to?” or “Go Home”. outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured2. You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant”, “Fuel”, or killed. 3 “Transit”, “Lodging”, “Shopping”, “Bank”, “Enter- • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your tainment”, “Recreation”, “Attractions”, “Commu- vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat nity”, “Auto Services”, “Hospitals”, “Parking”, “Air- belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are port”, “Police Stations”, “Fire Stations”, or “Auto more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Dealers”. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andNOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold using a seat belt properly.face and shaded grey. Power Seats — If EquippedSEATS On models equipped with power seats, the switch isSeats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor.vehicle. Use this switch to move the driver’s seat up or down, forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
  • 199. 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: The passenger’s seat will move up or down, Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearwardforward or rearward. The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front Power Seat Switches or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat1 — Seat Control cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release2 — Seatback Control the switch when the desired position has been reached.
  • 200. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201Reclining The Seatback WARNING! (Continued)The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that therearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, shoulder belt is no longer resting against yourthe seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release chest. In a collision you could slide under the seatthe switch when the desired position is reached. belt, which could result in serious injury or death. 3 WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. CAUTION! Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious Do not place any article under a power seat or injury or death. impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted path. seat belt. Power Lumbar — If Equipped (Continued) Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
  • 201. 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLElumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the Heated Seats — If Equippedpower seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to On some models, the front and rear seats may beincrease or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions andupward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar seatbacks.support. The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated using the Uconnect௡ System. WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Power Lumbar Switch (Continued)
  • 202. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 Front Heated Seat Operations — Vehicles WARNING! (Continued) Equipped With Uconnect௡ 8.4 and 8.4 Nav: • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the Uconnect௡ This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting display. in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera- 3 ture of the seat.Front Heated Seat Operation — Vehicles EquippedWith Uconnect௡ 4.3:Press the CLIMATE hard-key (located next to theUconnect௡ screen) to enter the climate control screen. Press the “Driver” or “Pass” seat soft-key (lo- cated on the Uconnect௡ screen) once to select HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second time to select LO-level heating. Press the soft- Controls Soft-Keykey a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.
  • 203. 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt once to select HI-level heating. Press the soft- within two to five minutes. key a second time to select LO-level heating. When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will Press the soft-key a third time to shut the provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutesheating elements OFF. of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after ap- proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati- cally after approximately 45 minutes. Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Heated Seats Soft-Keys Vehicle” for further information.
  • 204. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205Rear Heated Seats • The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.On some models, the two outboard seats are equippedwith heated seats. The heated seat switches for these When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater willseats are located on the rear of the center console. There provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutesare two heated seat switches that allow the rear passen- of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to thegers to operate the seats independently. normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the 3 system will automatically switch to LO-level after aYou can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At thatindicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from twouse. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting willLO and none for OFF. turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes. Press the switch once to select HI-level heating. Ventilated Seats — If Equipped Press the switch a second time to select LO- level heating. Press the switch a third time to On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are shut the heating elements OFF. ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw air from the seat surface throughNOTE: fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within and front passenger cooler in higher ambient tempera- two to five minutes. tures.
  • 205. 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe ventilated seats can be operated using the Uconnect௡ Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once toSystem. select HI-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a second time to select LO-level ventilation. Press the soft-key aFront Ventilated Seat Operation — Uconnect௡ third time to shut off the seat ventilation.8.4/8.4 Nav:Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of theUconnect௡ display. Ventilated Seats Soft-Keys NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate. Controls Soft-Key
  • 206. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207Vehicles Equipped With Remote StartOn models that are equipped with remote start, thedriver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come onduring a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting YourVehicle” for further information. 3Manual Seats — If EquippedForward Or Rearward AdjustmentThe adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear-ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the position Manual Seat Adjusting Bardesired. Using body pressure, move forward and rear-ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters havelatched.
  • 207. 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.ReclineTo adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on theoutboard side of the seat, lean back to the desiredposition and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift Manual Recline Leverthe lever, lean forward and release the lever. WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
  • 208. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209Head Restraints Active Head Restraints — Front SeatsHead restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury The front driver and passenger seats are equipped withby restricting head movement in the event of a rear Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top impact the AHRs will automatically extend forwardof the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head and the AHR. 3 WARNING! The AHRs will automatically return to their normal The head restraints for all occupants must be prop- position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu- return to their normal position see your authorized pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad- dealer immediately. justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
  • 209. 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed byrestraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If eitherbutton, located at the base of the head restraint, and push of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-downward on the head restraint. rized dealer. WARNING! Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death. Rear Head Restraints The center head restraint has two positions, up or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint Push Button should be in the raised position. When there are no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
  • 210. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head NOTE: The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Knowbutton, located at the base of the head restraint, and push Before Starting Your Vehicle” for tether routing.downward on the head restraint. Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an 3 additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on the loops located on the upper seatback. Push Button
  • 211. 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use. Folded Rear Seatback When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make Rear Seatback Loop sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of theAfter releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward. seatback above the seat strap.
  • 212. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! This feature allows the driver to store up to two different• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into memory profiles for easy recall through a memory position. If the seatback is not securely locked into switch. Each memory profile contains desired position position, the seat will not provide the proper sta- settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp- pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steer- 3 erly latched seat could cause serious injury. ing column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans- rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi- position) should not be used as a play area by tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed. children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should NOTE: be seated and using the proper restraint system. • Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions. • Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the memory function. Use either the memory recall switch or the RKE transmitter (if linked to the memory feature) to recall memory positions 1 or 2.
  • 213. 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door Programming The Memory Featuretrim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S) NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase anbutton, which is used to activate the memory save existing profile from memory.function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used torecall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles. To create a new memory profile, perform the following: 1. Place the ignition into the RUN position. 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio station presets). 3. Press and release the SET (S) button on the memory switch. 4. Within five seconds, press and release the MEMORY button 1 or 2. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped) will display which Memory Seat Switches memory position has been set.
  • 214. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215NOTE: To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow- ing:• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a 1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the memory profile. ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).• The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature 3 can be turned on and off using the Uconnect௡ System, 2. Select desired memory profile 1 or 2. refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your 3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release Instrument Panel” for further information. the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then pressLinking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry and release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2Transmitter To Memory accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will displayYour RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped withof two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the the EVIC.UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. 4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds.
  • 215. 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of thememory settings by pressing the SET (S) button followed MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door duringby the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, sideabove. mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop mov-Memory Position Recall ing. A delay of one second will occur before another recallNOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory can be selected.positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not Easy Entry/Exit Seatin PARK, a message will display in the EVIC (if (Available With Memory Seat Only)equipped). This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning toTo recall the memory settings for driver 1, press enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting theMEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door or the vehicle.UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked tomemory position 1. The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where you have the driver’s seat positioned when you removeTo recall the memory setting for driver 2, press MEMORY the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition tobutton number 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position2. • When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
  • 216. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move about • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat position is driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit position when you place the ignition into the ACC or or Easy Entry. RUN position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy 3• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or Entry and Easy Exit position. change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be turned Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move to a on and off using the Uconnect௡ System, refer to position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the “Uconnect௡ Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instru- driver’s seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (22.7 ment Panel” for further information. mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition in the ACC or RUN position.
  • 217. 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safetyTwo latches must be released to open the hood. catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood.1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel. Hood Safety Catch Hood Release Lever
  • 218. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 CAUTION! WARNING!To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving yourclose it. Lower the hood until it is open 8 in (20 cm) vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could openapproximately and then drop it. This should secure when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the Failure to follow this warning could result in serious 3hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. injury or death.
  • 219. 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLELIGHTSHeadlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, inte-rior lights and fog lights. Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op- eration.
  • 220. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221Automatic Headlights — If Equipped addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.This system automatically turns the headlights on or offaccording to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can berotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the turned on or off using the Uconnect௡ System, refer toAUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights ment Panel” for further information. 3will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the SmartBeam™ — If Equippedignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forwardsystem off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTOposition. lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on theNOTE: The engine must be running before the head- inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe-lights will come on in the automatic mode. cific light and automatically switches from high beams toHeadlights On With Wipers (Available with low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.Automatic Headlights Only)When this feature is active, the headlights will turn onapproximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned onif the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
  • 221. 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: 2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.• The SmartBeam™ system can be turned on and off using the Uconnect௡ System, refer to “Uconnect௡ NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” at or above 20 mph (32 km/h). for further information. To Deactivate• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights 1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, operation of low beams). and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly. 2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system.If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is replaced, theSmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper Headlight Time Delayperformance. See your local authorized dealer. This feature provides the safety of headlight illuminationTo Activate for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position.
  • 222. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equippedwhile the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the The Daytime Running Lights will turn On the first timeheadlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins the vehicle is shifted out of PARK, and remain On unlesswhen the headlight switch is turned off. the Parking Brake is applied. Upon returning to theNOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds PARK position, the DRLs will turn Off. DRLs will turnof turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature. Off when the ignition is switched OFF. 3If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights can be turned onON again, the system will cancel the delay. and off using the Uconnect௡ System, refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forIf you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will further information.turn off in the normal manner. Lights-On ReminderNOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable us-ing theUconnect௡ System, refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignitionin “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driverinformation. when the driver’s door is opened.
  • 223. 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEFog Lights — If Equipped To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parkingThe front fog light switch is built into the headlight lights or the low beam headlights and press theswitch. headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch. An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on. NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights. Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the Fog Light Switch steering column.
  • 224. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 NOTE: • If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. 3 • A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC (if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. Multifunction Lever Lane Change AssistTurn Signals Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flashMove the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows three times then automatically turn off.on each side of the instrument cluster flash to showproper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
  • 225. 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEHigh/Low Beam Switch Front Map/Reading LightsPush the multifunction lever away from you to switch The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever head console.toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.Flash-To-PassYou can signal another vehicle with your headlights bylightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. Thiswill turn on the high beam headlights until the lever isreleased.NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-topass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beamswill shut off. Front Map/Reading Lights
  • 226. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either Courtesy Lightsside of the console. These buttons are backlit for night The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the toptime visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens asecond time. The lights will also turn on when the second time.UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ispressed. 3 Courtesy Lights Front Map/Reading Light Switches
  • 227. 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEAmbient Light Interior LightsThe overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The interior lights come on when a door is opened.feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil- To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn offity of the floor center console and PRNDL area. automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch. Dimmer Controls The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel. Ambient Light
  • 228. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 3 Dimmer Controls Instrument Panel DimmerWith the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left Dome Light Positiondimmer control upward will increase the brightness of Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to thethe instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interiorequipped). lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position.
  • 229. 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEInterior Light Defeat (OFF)Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFFposition. The interior lights will remain off when thedoors are open.Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.This feature brightens all text displays such as theodometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio when the park-ing lights or headlights are on.WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wiper/Washer ControlThe multifunction lever operates the windshield wipersand washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN Intermittent Wiper Systemor ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditionsthe left side of the steering column. make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be- tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc- tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
  • 230. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate the CAUTION! (Continued)wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every secondto a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between • In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switchcycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to theWiper Operation windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur 3Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first when the vehicle is restarted.detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper • Always remove any buildup of snow that preventsoperation, or to the second detent past the intermittent the windshield wiper blades from returning to thesettings for high-speed wiper operation. off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off CAUTION! position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. • Turn the windshield wipers off when driving Windshield Washers through an automatic car wash. Damage to the To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward windshield wipers may result if the wiper control (toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as is left in any position other than off. washer spray is desired. (Continued)
  • 231. 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEIf you activate the washer while the windshield wiper Mist Featurecontrol is in the delay range, the wipers will operate forRotate the end of the lever downward to the Misttwo wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off roadthe intermittent interval previously selected. mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers willIf you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is continue to operate until you release the multifunctionturned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles lever.and then turn off. NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the WARNING! windshield. The wash function must be used in order to Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield spray the windshield with washer fluid. could lead to a collision. You might not see other Headlights On With Wipers (Available with vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of Automatic Headlights Only) the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on windshield washer use. approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
  • 232. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be NOTE:turned on or off using the Uconnect௡ System, refer to • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the“Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.ment Panel” for further information. • The Rain Sensing feature may not function properlyRain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped when ice, or dried salt water is present on the 3This feature senses moisture on the windshield and windshield.automatically activates the wipers for the driver. Thefeature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • Use of Rain-X௡ or products containing wax or siliconefrom the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate may reduce Rain Sensing performance.the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings The Rain Sensing system has protection features for theto activate this feature. wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under theThe sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the following conditions:multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least • Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition issensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi- first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will nottive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions. operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speedSettings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in theOFF position when not using the system.
  • 233. 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Transmission in NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU- TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using theUconnect௡ System, refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Un-derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-tion.TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN Tilt/Telescoping Control HandleThis feature allows you to tilt the steering column To unlock the steering column, pull the control handleupward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or down. To tilt the steering column, move the steeringshorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen orhandle is located below the steering wheel at the end of shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheelthe steering column. outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
  • 234. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235column in position, push the control handle up until fullyengaged. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv- 3 ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch— IF EQUIPPED To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down asThis feature allows you to tilt the steering column desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pullupward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or the lever toward you or push the lever away from you asshorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping desired.steering column lever is located below the multifunctionlever on the steering column.
  • 235. 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPEDyou can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- The steering wheel contains a heating element that helpster or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steeringto return the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre- wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heatedprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” steering wheel has been turned on it will operate forin this section. approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early WARNING! or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already Do not adjust the steering column while driving. warm. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv- The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the Uconnect௡ System. the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated death. Steering Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering wheel. Press the “Heated Steering Wheel” soft-key a second time to turn the heated steering wheel off.
  • 236. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 3Controls Soft-Key Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
  • 237. 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEduring a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow aVehicle” for further information. greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, WARNING! and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin from the driver to provide improved position with the because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, steering wheel. spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat tion, or other physical conditions must exercise cushion side shield. care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
  • 238. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 • The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys- tem is on. The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Informa- tion System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable 3 Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Ad- justable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”). NOTE: • Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full pedal travel. Adjustable Pedals Switch • Further small adjustments may be necessary to findPress the switch forward to move the pedals forward the best possible seat/pedal position.(toward the front of the vehicle).Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward(toward the driver).• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
  • 239. 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPEDyou can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes overter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mphto return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed posi- (40 km/h).tions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “UnderstandingThe Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. CAUTION! Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim- ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal’s path. WARNING! Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving. You could lose control and have an accident. Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
  • 240. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. To Activate Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator light in 3 the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use. WARNING! Electronic Speed Control Buttons Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES + when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally4 — CANCEL 3 — SET - set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec- You could lose control and have an accident. Alwaystronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut leave the system OFF when you are not using it.down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated atthe same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
  • 241. 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo Set A Desired Speed erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the setTurn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle speed memory.has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) buttonand release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will To Resume Speedoperate at the selected speed. To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)NOTE: button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).• The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button. To Vary The Speed Setting• The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- different size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button compact spare tire (if equipped). is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new setTo Deactivate speed will be established.A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mphbutton, or normal brake pressure while slowing the (1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap ofvehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
  • 242. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintainsset, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually speed up and down hills. A slight speed change onheld in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to moderate hills is normal.decrease until the button is released. Release the button On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur sowhen the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speedwill be established. 3 Control.Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of WARNING!the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where theTo Accelerate For Passing system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and youpedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roadsUsing Electronic Speed Control On Hills that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain thevehicle set speed.
  • 243. 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF preset following distance, while matching the speed ofEQUIPPED the vehicle ahead.Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the drivingconvenience provided by cruise control while traveling WARNING!on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conveniencesafety system and not designed to prevent collisions. system. It is not a substitute for active drivingACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weatherneed to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehiclesensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you. ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all roadNOTE: conditions. Your complete attention is always re-• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, quired while driving to maintain safe control of ACC will maintain a fixed set speed. your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will injury. apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed • The ACC system: the original set speed) automatically to maintain a (Continued)
  • 244. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!– Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming ve- You should switch off the ACC system: hicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped • When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (e.g.,– Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi- tions into account, and may be limited upon in highway construction zones). 3 • When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; adverse sight distance conditions. when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-– Does not predict the lane curvature or the move- covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill ment of preceding vehicles and will not compen- slopes. sate for such changes. • When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.– Does not always fully recognize complex driving • When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a conditions, which can result in wrong or missing constant speed. distance warnings. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a– Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehi- collision and death or serious personal injury. cle’s braking capability, and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop. The Cruise Control system has two control modes: • Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.
  • 245. 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruis- ing at a constant preset speed. For additional informa- tion, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.NOTE: The system will not react to preceding vehicles.Always be aware of the mode selected.You can change the mode by using the Cruise Controlbuttons. The two control modes function differently.Always confirm which mode is selected.Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) OperationThe speed control buttons (located on the right side of the Adaptive Cruise Control Buttonssteering wheel) operates the ACC system. 1 — DISTANCE SETTING 2 — RES + 3 — SET - 4 — CANCEL 5 — ON/OFF 6 — MODE
  • 246. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the ve- NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the followinghicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise conditions:Control. • When you apply the brakes.Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) • When the parking brake is set.You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 320 mph (32 km/h). • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE- VERSE or NEUTRAL.When the system is turned on and in the READY state,the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis- • When pushing the RES + button without a previouslyplays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.” set speed in memory.When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “AdaptiveCruise Control Off.”
  • 247. 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo Activate To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFFPush and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in button again. At this time, the system will turn off andthe EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.” the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) OFF Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
  • 248. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 WARNING! Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden- tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. 3 Always leave the system off when you are not using it.To Set A Desired ACC SpeedWhen the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push theSET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set ACC Setspeed. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs: • The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the EVIC.
  • 249. 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• The system will not be controlling the distance be- To Cancel tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle The system will disable ACC without erasing the speed will only be determined by the position of the memory if: accelerator pedal. • You softly tap the brake pedal. • You depress the brake pedal. • You press the CANCEL switch. • The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (25 km/h) • An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs. • The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL. • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- tem (ESC/TCS) activates. NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off, Driver Override ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
  • 250. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 To Resume Speed Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set speed. NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of 3 18 mph (30 km/h). WARNING! The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cancelled that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic andTo Turn Off road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure toThe system will turn off and erase the set speed in follow these warnings can result in a collision andmemory if: death or serious personal injury.• You push and release the ON/OFF button.• You turn OFF the ignition.
  • 251. 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo Vary The Speed Setting Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap ofWhile ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).pressing and holding the RES + button. If the button iscontinually pressed, the set speed will continue to in- NOTE:crease in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if thereleased. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicledisplay. sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake systemPressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph will automatically slow the vehicle.(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap ofthe button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h). • The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring theWhile ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by vehicle to a complete stop.pressing and holding the SET - button. If the button iscontinually pressed, the set speed will continue to de- • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving upcrease in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change onreleased. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshiftingEVIC display. may occur while climbing uphill or descending down- hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main- tain set speed.
  • 252. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253Setting The Following Distance In ACCThe specified following distance for ACC can be set byvarying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (me-dium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and thevehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to thevehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC. 3 Distance Set 2 (medium) Distance Set 3 (long)
  • 253. 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi- cator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto- matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed. The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until: • The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed. • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor. • The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph Distance Set 1 (short) (24 km/h) and the system automatically disengagesTo change the distance setting, press the Distance button itself.and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance • The distance setting is changed.setting adjusts between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1(short). • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on ACC Activation).If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain theset speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
  • 254. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, ifnecessary.NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever theACC system applies the brakes. 3A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predictsthat its maximum braking level is not sufficient tomaintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will soundwhile ACC continues to apply its maximum brakingcapacity. When this occurs, you should immediatelyapply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance Brake Alert 3from the vehicle ahead.
  • 255. 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Brake Alert 2 Brake Alert 1 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The information it displays depends on ACC system status.
  • 256. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “ACC” • The set speed will continue to display in place of theor “Cruise” is highlighted in the EVIC. Status of the ACC odometer reading when changing the EVIC displayor Cruise is also displayed in the menu line. while ACC is set.Press and release the SELECT (right arrow) button to The ACC screen will display once again if any ACCdisplay the following information: activity occurs, which may include any of the following: 3Adaptive Cruise Control Off • Set Speed Change• When ACC is deactivated, the display will read • Distance Setting Change “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” • System CancelAdaptive Cruise Control Ready • Driver Override• When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive • System Off Cruise Control Ready.” • ACC Proximity WarningACC SET • ACC Unavailable Warning• When ACC is set, the set speed will display. • The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity.
  • 257. 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEDisplay Warnings And Maintenance NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning Control is still available. For additional information referThe ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in thiswarning will display when conditions temporarily limit section.system performance. This most often occurs at times ofpoor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal ofsystem may also become temporarily blinded due toobstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of theEVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of vehicle behind the lower grille.Vehicle” and the system will deactivate. To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-The “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” message tant to note the following maintenance items:can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe thereflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damagesnow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has the sensor lens.left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is • Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing sonot tracking any vehicles or objects in its path thiswarning may temporarily occur. could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment.
  • 258. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259• If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. authorized dealer for service. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction. 3When the condition that deactivated the system is nolonger present, the system will return to the “AdaptiveCruise Control Off” state and will resume function bysimply reactivating it.NOTE: Installing a vehicle front-end protector or anaftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom-mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACCoperation.ACC Unavailable Warning Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable WarningIf the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC) Unavailable”, there may be a
  • 259. 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPrecautions While Driving With ACCIn certain driving situations, ACC may have detectionissues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need tointervene.Adding A Trailer HitchThe weight of a trailer/hitch may affect the performanceof ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performancefollowing the installation of a trailer/hitch, or if the ACCperformance does not return to normal after removingthe trailer/hitch see your authorized dealer. Turns And BendsOffset Driving In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead tooACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake lateoffset from your direct line of travel. There will not be or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and besufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select anmay move in and out of the line of travel, which can appropriate speed while driving in curves.cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
  • 260. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 Using ACC On Hills When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor- mance may be limited. 3ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driveralert that you consider unnecessary. This may be thesystem’s response to signs, guardrails, and other station-ary objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base ofsteep hills. This is normal operation and your vehicledoes not require service.
  • 261. 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLELane ChangingACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in thelane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes andit may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACCsystem to take action. ACC will not detect a vehicle untilit is completely in the lane. There will not be sufficientdistance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There will not be suffi- cient distance to the vehicle ahead.
  • 262. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 3Stationary Objects And Vehicles General InformationACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systemsvehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situationswhere the vehicle you are following exits your lane and Classification Specifications:the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be 47 C.F.R. Part 15attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. 47 C.F.R Part 15.515
  • 263. 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENormal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode WARNING!In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruis- In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system willing at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximitydesigned to maintain a set cruising speed without requir- warning does not activate and no alarm will sounding the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead sincecan only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the(32 km/h). vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle andTo change modes, press the MODE button when the the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode issystem is in either the OFF, READY, or SET position. selected.While pressing the mode button, a chime alerts the driverto the change of state from Adaptive Cruise Control to To Set A Desired Speednormal Cruise Control. “Cruise Ready” will be displayed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press theif the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position. SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set“Cruise Off” will be displayed if the system was in the speed.ACC OFF position. To switch back to Adaptive CruiseControl mode, press the MODE button a second time. NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or changing speed, not the speedometer.
  • 264. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265To Vary The Speed Setting To ResumeThere are two ways to change the set speed: Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set• Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the speed. desired speed and press the SET - button. To Turn Off 3• Tap the RES + or SET - button to increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increments respec- The system will turn off and erase the set speed in tively. Hold the RES + or SET - button for 5 mph memory if: (8 km/h) increments. • You push and release the ON/OFF button.To Cancel • You turn off the ignition.The system will disable normal Cruise Control without • You switch off ESC.erasing the memory if: If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated,• You softly tap or depress the brake pedal. the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or• You press the CANCEL button. Normal Cruise Control).• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
  • 265. 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEForward Collision Warning — If Equipped WARNING!The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system providesthe driver with audible and visual warnings (within the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended toEVIC) when it detects a potential frontal collision. The avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detectwarnings are intended to provide the driver with enough every type of potential collision. The driver has thetime to react and avoid the potential collision. responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to followFCW monitors the information from the forward looking this warning could lead to serious injury or death.sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end Changing FCW Statuscollision. When the system determines that a rear-end The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned offcollision is probable a warning message (both audible using the Uconnect௡ System, refer to “Uconnect௡ Set-and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forsystem determines a collision with the vehicle in front of further information. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far willyou is no longer probable, the warning message will be be displayed in the Uconnect௡ display.deactivated. The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allowsNOTE: The minimum speed for FCW activation is the system to warn you of a possible collision with the10 mph (16 km/h). vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time.
  • 266. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows • The system will retain the last setting selected by thethe system to warn you of a possible collision with the driver after ignition shut down.vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This • FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over-setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the pathwhich allows for a more dynamic driving experience. of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncom-Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system ing traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher 3from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle rate of speed.in front of you. • If the FCW becomes disabled then a warning willNOTE: display on the EVIC screen.• In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the Uconnect௡ display.
  • 267. 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEFCW Unavailable WarningIf the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable, Service Required”, there may be atemporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.Although the vehicle is still drivable under normalconditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If thisoccurs, try activating FCW again later, following a keycycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer. ACC/FCW Unavailable, Service Required Warning PARKSENSEா REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
  • 268. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense௡ System obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 inUsage Precautions” for limitations of this system and (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontalrecommendations. direction, depending on the location, type and orienta- tion of the obstacle.ParkSense௡ will retain the last system state (enabled ordisabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is ParkSenseா Warning Displaychanged to the ON/RUN position. 3 The ParkSense௡ Warning screen will only be displayed ifParkSense௡ can be active only when the shift lever is in Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect௡ Sys-REVERSE. If ParkSense௡ is enabled at this shift lever tem. Refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understandingposition, the system will remain active until the vehicle Your Instrument Panel” for further information.speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or The ParkSense௡ Warning screen is located within theabove. The system will become active again if the vehicle Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It providesspeed is decreased to speeds less than approximately visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear6 mph (9 km/h). fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Elec-ParkSenseா Sensors tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-The four ParkSense௡ sensors, located in the rear fascia/ mation.bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that iswithin the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
  • 269. 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEParkSenseா DisplayWhen the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning displaywill turn ON indicating the system status. Park Assist System Off The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the EVIC Park Assist Ready display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
  • 270. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 3Slow Tone Fast Tone
  • 271. 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera- tion when the system is detecting an obstacle: Continuous Tone
  • 272. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater than 59-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than (in/cm) 59 in (150 cm) (150-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30 cm) Audible Alert None Single 1/2- Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone 3 Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow (Continuous) Flashing Flashing FlashingEnabling And Disabling ParkSenseா in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSEParkSense௡ can be enabled and disabled using theUconnect௡ System. The available choices are: Off, Sound and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as theOnly, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect௡ Set-tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for vehicle is in REVERSE at or below 7 mph (11 km/h).further information. Service The ParkSenseா Rear Park Assist SystemWhen the ParkSense௡ soft-key is pressed to disable the When the ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist system is mal-system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS- functioning, the Electronic Vehicle Information CenterTEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds. (EVIC) will actuate a single chime, once per ignitionRefer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” cycle, and it will display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”,
  • 273. 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE“SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or the “SERVICE PARK AS- Cleaning The ParkSenseா SystemSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Clean the ParkSense௡ sensors with water, car wash soapInformation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do notInstrument Panel” for further information. When the scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has age the sensors.detected a fault condition, the EVIC “PARK ASSISTSYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in ParkSenseா System Usage PrecautionsREVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense௡ will not NOTE:operate. • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the Electronic dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense௡ system operat-Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the outer ing properly.surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper isclean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc- • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations couldtion and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues affect the performance of ParkSense௡.to appear see an authorized dealer. • When you turn ParkSense௡ off, the EVIC will displayIf “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once youSYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer. turn ParkSense௡ off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
  • 274. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE CAUTION! position and ParkSense௡ is turned off, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for • ParkSense௡ is only a parking aid and it is unable to as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.• Clean the ParkSense௡ sensors regularly, taking care not Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be detected at all. Obstacles located above or below 3 covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. the sensors will not be detected when they are in Failure to do so can result in the system not working close proximity. properly. The ParkSense௡ system might not detect an • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide ParkSense௡ in order to be able to stop in time when a false indication that an obstacle is behind the an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the fascia/bumper. driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense௡.• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” message to be displayed in the EVIC.
  • 275. 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)• Drivers must be careful when backing up even • Before using the Rear Park Assist system, it is when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always strongly recommended that the ball mount and check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve- you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to backing up. You are responsible for safety and vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be must continue to pay attention to your surround- much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia ings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. death. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and (Continued) shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
  • 276. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277PARKVIEWா REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rearEQUIPPED camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView௡ RearBack Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the widthimage of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever of the vehicle the static grid lines will show separatethe shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the 3displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau- vehicle.The following table shows the approximate dis-tion note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of tances for each zone:the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.The ParkView௡ camera is located on the rear of thevehicle above the rear License plate. Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m) Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
  • 277. 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION!Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView௡ should onlyusing the ParkView௡ Rear Back Up Camera. Always be used as a parking aid. The ParkView௡ camera ischeck carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in yourcheck for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob- drive path.structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must beresponsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using ParkView௡ to be able tomust continue to pay attention while backing up. stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. mended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView௡. NOTE:If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
  • 278. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279Turning ParkViewா On Or Off — With Touch OVERHEAD CONSOLEScreen Radio The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights1. Turn the Radio on. and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink௡) and power sunroof switches may2. Press the “More” soft-key. also be included, if equipped.3. Press the “Settings” soft-key. 34. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.5. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview௡ Backup Camera” to enable/disable. Overhead Console
  • 279. 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEFront Map/Reading Lights To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. TheLights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights willcan be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed.the console. These buttons are backlit for night timevisibility. Courtesy Lights The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time. Front Map/Reading Lights
  • 280. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281 3 Courtesy Lights Sunglasses Bin DoorSunglasses Bin Door GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPEDAt the front of the console a compartment is provided for HomeLink௡ replaces up to three hand-held transmittersthe storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart- that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome ized gates, lighting or home security systems. Thepad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the HomeLink௡ unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Voltdoor to close. battery.
  • 281. 282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe HomeLink௡ buttons, located on either the overheadconsole, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-ent HomeLink௡ channels.The HomeLink௡ indicator islocated above the center button. HomeLink௡ Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner NOTE: HomeLink௡ is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- rity Alarm is active. HomeLink௡ Buttons/Overhead Consoles
  • 282. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283Before You Begin Programming HomeLinkா NOTE:Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed whenbefore you begin programming. programming HomeLink௡ for the first time. Do notFor more efficient programming and accurate transmis- erase channels when programming additional buttons.sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, pleasea new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of 3 call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet atthe device that is being programmed to the HomeLink௡ www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.system.Erase all channels before you begin programming. Toerase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUNposition and press and hold the two outside HomeLink௡buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the redindicator flashes.
  • 283. 284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEProgramming A Rolling CodeFor programming garage door openers that were manu-factured after 1995. These garage door openers can beidentified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button locatedwhere the hanging antenna is attached to the garage dooropener. It is NOT the button that is normally used toopen and close the door. The name and color of thebutton may vary by manufacturer. Training The Garage Door Opener 1 — Door Opener 2 — Training Button 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
  • 284. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2852. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN- away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to pro- ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices gram while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in there may be a light that blinks when the garage door view. opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink௡ NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next button you want to program and the hand-held trans- step after the LEARN button has been pressed. 3 mitter button. 6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- HomeLink௡ button twice (holding the button for two cator light. The HomeLink௡ indicator will flash slowly seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device and then rapidly after HomeLink௡ has received the activates, programming is complete. frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti- lease both buttons after the indicator light changes vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to from slow to rapid. complete the training.5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink௡ buttons, locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels. attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
  • 285. 286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEReprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Button 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to pro-To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, gram while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light infollow these steps: view.1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink௡2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until button you want to program and the hand-held trans- the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do mitter button. not release the button. 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- cator light. The Homelink௡ indicator will flash slowly ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining and then rapidly after HomeLink௡ has received the steps. frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- lease both buttons after the indicator light changesProgramming A Non-Rolling Code from slow to rapid.For programming Garage Door Openers manufacturedbefore 1995. 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink௡ button and observe the indicator light.1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- ming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink௡ button is pressed.
  • 286. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287 • To program the two remaining HomeLink௡ buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States erase the channels. that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” afterReprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Button several seconds of transmission.To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- 3follow these steps: nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans- mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink௡1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do time-out in the same manner. not release the button. It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- process to prevent possible overheating of the garage ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all door or gate motor. remaining steps. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
  • 287. 288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to pro- ming is complete and the garage door/device should gram while keeping the HomeLink௡ indicator light in activate when the HomeLink௡ button is pressed. view. • To program the two remaining HomeLink௡ buttons,3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink௡ button, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held erase the channels. transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink௡ has If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- programming, plug it back in at this time. cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when Reprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Button fully trained. To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,4. Watch for the HomeLink௡ indicator to change flash follow these steps: rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. door may open and close while you are programming. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink௡ button the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do and observe the indicator light. not release the button.
  • 288. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2893. Without releasing the button proceed with The HomeLink௡ Universal Transceiver is disabled when “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. follow all remaining steps. Troubleshooting TipsUsing HomeLinkா If you are having trouble programming HomeLink௡, hereTo operate, press and release the programmed are some of the most common solutions: 3HomeLink௡ button. Activation will now occur for the • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera- ter.tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Openeralso be used at any time. to complete the training for a Rolling Code.Security • Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turnin your vehicle. If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet atTo do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that allchannels will be erased. Individual channels cannot beerased.
  • 289. 290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information WARNING! This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry• Your motorized door or gate will open and close Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following while you are programming the universal trans- two conditions: ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door 2. This device must accept any interference that may be opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as received including interference that may cause unde- required by Federal safety standards. This includes sired operation. most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without NOTE: these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex- safety information or assistance. pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan- ance could void the user’s authority to operate the gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage device. while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. • The term IC before the certification/registration num- ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci- fications were met.
  • 290. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!The power sunroof switch is located between the sunvisors on the overhead console. • Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™). Occupants, particu- 3 larly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen- gers are also properly secured. Power Sunroof Switch • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
  • 291. 292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEOpening Sunroof — Express position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati- cally. This is called “Express Close”. During ExpressPress the switch rearward and release it within one-half Close operation, any movement of the switch will stopsecond and the sunroof will open automatically from any the sunroof.position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Closing Sunroof — Manual ModeOpen operation, any movement of the sunroof switch To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in thewill stop the sunroof. forward position. Any release of the switch will stop theOpening Sunroof — Manual Mode movement and the sunroof will remain in a partiallyTo open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and heldto full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially Pinch Protect Featureopened condition until the switch is pushed and held This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening ofrearward again. the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-Closing Sunroof — Express struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, thePress the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-second and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close.
  • 292. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re- Wind Buffetingsult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt Wind buffeting can be described as the perception ofwill be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in thedisabled. ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with theVenting Sunroof — Express windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- 3Press and release the Vent button within one half second rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs withand the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is the rear windows open, then open the front and rearcalled “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of windows together to minimize the buffeting. If thesunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust themovement of the switch will stop the sunroof. sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open anySunshade Operation window.The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Sunroof Maintenancesunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to cleanNOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is the glass panel.open.
  • 293. 294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEIgnition Off Operation Sunroof Fully ClosedFor vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Press the switch forward and release to ensure that theInformation Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch sunroof is fully closed.will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switchis turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETSdoor will cancel this feature. There are three 12 Volt (13 Amps) electrical power outletsNOTE: on this vehicle. The power outlets are protected by a fuse.• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi- outlets for use to ensure proper operation. mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR௡ knob to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will and element must be used. cancel this feature.• The Ignition Off time is programmable using the Uconnect௡ System. Refer to “Uconnect௡ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
  • 294. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295 CAUTION! • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. 3 • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Front Power OutletThe front 12 Volt power outlet has power available onlywhen the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position. WARNING! Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could result.
  • 295. 296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEThe center console outlet is powered directly from the There is also a 12 volt power outlet located on the back ofbattery (power available at all times). Items plugged into the center console for rear passengers. This power outletthis outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the has power available only when the ignition is placed inengine from starting. the ACC or RUN position. Center Console Power Outlet Rear Center Console Power Outlet
  • 296. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297 WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. 3 • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Power Outlet Fuse Locations1 — #12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel &Power Outlet Console Rear2 — #38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
  • 297. 298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw • After the use of high power draw accessories or power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in long periods of the vehicle not being started (with use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will driven a sufficient length of time to allow the discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. prevent the engine from starting. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces- vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat- sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit- power outlet can cause damage. tently and with greater caution. (Continued)
  • 298. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299CUPHOLDERSFront Seat CupholdersThe cupholders are located in the forward edge of thecenter console. 3 Front Cupholders Retractable Cover
  • 299. 300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEHeated and Cooled Cupholders — If Equipped Press the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the cupholder;Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off.cupholders. The cupholders are designed to help keep Press the “Hot” symbol once to activate the cupholder; press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder.warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool. WARNING! When using the cupholder in the “Hot” position, avoid contact with the heated portion of the cup- holder in order to reduce the possibility of burns. Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- tion or other physical condition must exercise par- ticular care in order to prevent serious burn injury. Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects when operated in the Heat position. Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
  • 300. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301Rear Seat Cupholders Lighted Cupholders — If EquippedThe rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped withbetween the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rearforward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide con- passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmervenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintain- Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Fea-ing a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows. tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information. 3 Rear Seat Cupholders Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
  • 301. 302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLESTORAGEGlovebox StorageThe glovebox storage compartment is located on thepassenger side of the instrument panel. Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment Console Features There is an open cubby bin located forward of the shift lever. Glovebox Storage Compartment Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the center console armrest.
  • 302. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303 integrated coin holder, along with additional area for small items like an ipod or phone. Below the upper tray, the lower storage compartment is made for larger items, like CDs and tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 volt power outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here. 3 WARNING! Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart- ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music players, and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices Center Console while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable tion, resulting in death or injury.upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward onrails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
  • 303. 304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEDoor Storage Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped with 60/40The door panels contain storage areas. Split-Folding Rear Seat The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor. When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap. Front Door Trim Storage
  • 304. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305 WARNING! WARNING!• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into The weight and position of cargo and passengers can position. If the seatback is not securely locked into change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle position, the seat will not provide the proper sta- handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per- bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp- sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your 3 erly latched seat could cause serious injury. vehicle:• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the • Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos- position) should not be used as a play area by sible. children when the vehicle is in motion. They could • Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear be seriously injured in a collision. Children should axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight be seated and using the proper restraint system. over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of• To help protect against personal injury, passengers the vehicle to sway. should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes the seatback. This could impair visibility or be- only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or and use seat belts. collision. (Continued)
  • 305. 306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEREAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION!Rear Window Defroster Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: The rear window defroster button is located on • Use care when washing the inside of the rear the climate control. Press this button to turn on the window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners onrear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if the interior surface of the window. Use a soft clothequipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to thewhen the rear window defroster is on. The rear window heating elements. Labels can be peeled off afterdefroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 soaking with warm water.minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasivepress the button a second time. window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
  • 306. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbersThe automatic load leveling system will provide a level- raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takesriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions.conditions. If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The 3 vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
  • 307. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELCONTENTSⅥ INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .311 ▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329Ⅵ INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 ▫ Oil Change Due . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 4Ⅵ INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . .313 ▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333Ⅵ INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .314 ▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335Ⅵ ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION ▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 ▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .336 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 ▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 ▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 ▫ Turn Menu OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 ▫ EVIC Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
  • 308. 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELⅥ Uconnect௡ SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Ⅵ STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 ▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 ▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 ▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 ▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect௡ 4.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Ⅵ CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .369 ▫ Customer Programmable Features — Ⅵ RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .370 Uconnect௡ 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Ⅵ CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370Ⅵ iPod௡/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 ▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370Ⅵ HARMAN KARDON௡ Logic7௡ HIGH ▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE ▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .366 ▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .379 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
  • 309. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 41 — Air Outlet 7 — ESC Off Switch 13 — Engine Start/Stop Button2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Uconnect௡ System Hard Controls 14 — Trunk Release Button3 — Hazard Switch 9 — SD Memory Card Slot 15 — Dimmer Controls4 — Uconnect௡ System 10 — Power Outlet 16 — Hood Release5 — Climate Control Hard Controls 11 — CD/DVD Slot 17 — Headlight Switch6 — Glove Compartment 12 — Storage Compartment
  • 310. 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELINSTRUMENT CLUSTER
  • 311. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM 4
  • 312. 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELINSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven1. Tachometer more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn theThis gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check(RPM x 1000). for a defective outside light bulb.2. AWD (All Wheel Drive) Indicator — If Equipped 5. Front Fog Light Indicator — If EquippedThe AWD indicator will illuminate when All Wheel Drive This indicator will illuminate when the front fog(AWD) is activated. lights are on.3. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped 6. High Beam Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the park This indicator shows that the high beam head- lights or headlights are turned on. lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for- ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull4. Turn Signal Indicators toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam. The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
  • 313. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3157. Odometer Display /Electronic Vehicle Information Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) DisplayCenter (EVIC) Display The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-Odometer Display tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. For further information, refer toThe odometer display shows the total distance the ve- “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.hicle has been driven. The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within theU.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of EVIC display. It displays the gear position of the auto- 4vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the matic transmission.correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If yourodometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair NOTE:technician should leave the odometer reading the same You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK.as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must The highest available transmission gear is displayed inbe placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Informa-before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to tion Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range Selectmake a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector on the shiftservice, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or lever to activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission”that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer in “Starting And Operating” for further information.must be reset at zero.
  • 314. 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper inflated to the inflation pressure recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation hasplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMShas tires of a different size than the size indicated on the low tire pressure telltale.vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSdetermine the proper tire inflation pressure for those malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is nottires.) operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator isAs an added safety feature, your vehicle has been combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When theequipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when approximately one minute and then remain continuouslyone or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressureon a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a varietyoverheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
  • 315. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the 9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part ofTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, thattires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the monitors engine and automatic transmission con-replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is into continue to function properly. the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb CAUTION! does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. 4 The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may warning have been established for the tire size illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- be serviced if the light stays on through several of your tion or sensor damage may result when using re- typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will placement equipment that is not of the same size, drive normally and will not require towing. type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
  • 316. 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 10. Speedometer CAUTION! Indicates vehicle speed.Prolonged driving with the MIL on could causedamage to the engine control system. It also could 11. Fuel Door Reminderaffect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that theflashing, severe catalytic converter damage and Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of thepower loss will soon occur. Immediate service is vehicle.required. 12. Fuel Gauge WARNING! The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referencedabove, can reach higher temperatures than in normal 13. Air Bag Warning Lightoperating conditions. This can cause a fire if you This light will turn on for four to eight secondsdrive slowly or park over flammable substances such as a bulb check when the ignition switch is firstas dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not onin death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or during starting, stays on, or turns on whileothers. driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
  • 317. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” 15. Sport Mode — If Equippedin “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for This light will illuminate when the sport modefurther information. is selected. This mode provides performance14. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light based tuning. For further information, refer to ”Sport Mode” in “Starting And Operating” . This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition 16. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and 4 This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- may stay on for as long as four seconds. mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle securityIf the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it alarm is arming, and then will flash slowlyindicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system until the vehicle is disarmed.is not functioning and that service is required. However, 17. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicatorthe conventional brake system will continue to operate Light — If Equippednormally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock trol (ESC) is off.brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when theignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, havethe light inspected by an authorized dealer.
  • 318. 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL18. Brake Warning Light The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic This light monitors various brake functions, system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is including brake fluid level and parking brake indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on application. If the brake light turns on it may when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has indicate that the parking brake is applied, that dropped below a specified level.the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem withthe anti-lock brake system reservoir. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.If the light remains on when the parking brake has been NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharpdisengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake tions. The vehicle should have service performed, andhydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the the brake fluid level checked.Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. sary.In this case, the light will remain on until the conditionhas been corrected. If the problem is related to the brakebooster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brakeand a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
  • 319. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is WARNING! applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. 19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light — If EquippedVehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System 4(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force The “ESC Activation/Malfunction IndicatorDistribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Light” in the instrument cluster will come onBrake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS when the ignition switch is turned to theLight. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engineturning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESCON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap- system. If this light remains on after several ignitionproximately two seconds. The light should then turn off cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several milesunless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), seedetected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have theinspected by an authorized dealer. problem diagnosed and corrected.
  • 320. 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: 21. Seat Belt Reminder LightThe “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/ When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each RUN, this light will turn on for four to eighttime the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN. seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seatsystem will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder LightThe ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer towhen it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Start-when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that ing Your Vehicle” for further information.caused the ESC activation. 22. Temperature Gauge20. O/D (Overdrive) OFF Indicator Light The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera- This light will illuminate when the O/D OFF ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that button has been selected and overdrive has been the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.turned off. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera- ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
  • 321. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 CAUTION! WARNING!Driving with a hot engine cooling system could A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You ordamage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads others could be badly burned by steam or boiling“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealerwith the air conditioner turned off until the pointer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide todrops back into the normal range. If the pointer look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Yourremains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling 4turn the engine off immediately and call an autho- System Pressure Cap paragraph.rized dealer for service.
  • 322. 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful(EVIC) information by pressing the switches mounted on theThe Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Radio Infoinstrument cluster. • Fuel Economy • Vehicle Speed • Trip Info • Tire Pressure • Vehicle Info (Stored Warning Messages) • Turn Menu OFF Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
  • 323. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325The system allows the driver to select information by UP Buttonpressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP button to scroll up-wheel: ward through the main menu and Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Ve- hicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Trip Info, Vehicle Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and sub-menus. DOWN Button 4 Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menu and Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Trip Info, Vehicle Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and sub-menus. EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
  • 324. 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELSELECT Button 2. The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed. Press and release the SELECT button for access to main menus, sub-menus or to select a per- 3. The reconfigurable telltales section. sonal setting in the setup menu. Press and hold The main display area will normally display the main the SELECT button for two seconds to reset menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main features. menu. The main display area also displays Љpop upЉBACK Button messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn- ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall Press the BACK button to scroll back to a into several categories: previous menu or sub-menu. • Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur, this type ofElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) message takes control of the main display area for fiveDisplays seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most ofThe EVIC display consists of three sections: the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the condition that activated it remains active) and can be1. The top line where compass direction and outside reviewed from the ЉMessagesЉ main menu item. As long temperature are displayed. as there is a stored message, an ЉiЉ will be displayed in the
  • 325. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this and then returns to the previous screen. Examples of thismessage type are ЉRight Front Turn Signal Lamp OutЉ message type are ЉMemory System Unavailable - Not inand ЉLow Tire PressureЉ. ParkЉ and ЉAutomatic High Beams OnЉ.• Unstored Messages The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into theThis message type is displayed indefinitely or until the white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in thecondition that activated the message is cleared. Examples middle, and red telltales on the left.of this message type are ЉTurn Signal OnЉ (if a turn signal EVIC White Telltale Lights 4is left on) and ЉLights OnЉ (if driver leaves the vehicle). This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell-• Unstored Messages Until RUN tales. These telltales include:These messages deal primarily with the Remote Startfeature. This message type is displayed until the ignition • Shift Lever Statusis in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,6,5,4,3,2,1” are dis-ЉRemote Start Aborted - Door AjarЉ and ЉPress Brake played indicating the shift lever position. TelltalesPedal and Push Button to StartЉ. “6,5,4,3,2,1” indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS)• Five Second Unstored Messages feature has been engaged and the gear selected is dis-When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of mes- played. For further information on ERS, refer to “Startingsage takes control of the main display area for five seconds And Operating”
  • 326. 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Electronic Speed Control ON • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET This light will turn on when the electronic This light will turn on when the ACC is SET. speed control is ON. For further information, For further information, refer to “Adaptive refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.” Features Of Your Vehicle.”• Electronic Speed Control SET EVIC Amber Telltales This light will turn on when the electronic This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell- speed control is SET. For further information, tales. These telltales include: refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.” This telltale informs the driver that the For-• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON ward Collision Warning feature is Off. The This light will turn on when the ACC is ON. telltale is On when the front radar sensor is For further information, refer to “Adaptive blocked and requires cleaning, the ACC/FCW Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The sensors require service, or the ACC/FCW system is Features Of Your Vehicle.” unavailable because of a system error. For further infor- mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
  • 327. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329• Low Fuel Telltale • SERV AWD (Service All Wheel Drive) Indicator When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal This light will turn on when the All Wheel (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until Drive feature requires service. For further in-fuel is added. formation, refer to “All Wheel Drive” in “Start- ing And Operating.”• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator EVIC Red Telltale Lights This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind- shield washer fluid is low. This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These 4 telltales include:• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction • Door Ajar This light will turn on when a ACC is not This light will turn on to indicate that one or operating and needs service. For further infor- more doors may be ajar. mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of • Trunk AjarYour Vehicle.” This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk may be ajar.
  • 328. 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Oil Pressure Warning Light vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho- This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the rized dealer.light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut offthe engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for • If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Startingfour minutes when this light turns on. Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.• Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. This light informs you of a problem with the The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The• Charging System Light light will come on when the ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb This light shows the status of the electrical charg- check. If the light does not come on during starting, have ing system. The light should come on when the the system checked by an authorized dealer.ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulbcheck. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, • If a problem is detected, the light will come on whileturn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when thedevices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever ischarging system light remains on, it means that the placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
  • 329. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331• If the light remains lit with the engine running, your If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- light is flashing when the engine is running, immedi- hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to ate service is required. You may experience reduced normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To and your vehicle may require towing. Do In Emergencies” for more information.• Engine Temperature Warning Light • Transmission Temperature Warning Light 4 This light warns of an overheated engine condi- This light indicates that the transmission fluid tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap- temperature is running hot. This may occurproaches H, or 260°F, this indicator will illuminate and a with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If thissingle chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. light turns on, safely pull over and stop theFurther overheating will cause the temperature gauge to vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL andpass H, or 260°F, the indicator will continuously flash run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.and a continuous chime will occur until the engine isallowed to cool.
  • 330. 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next CAUTION! scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera- indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon severe transmission damage or transmission failure. your personal driving style. Unless reset, this message will continue to display each WARNING! time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, (after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to the following procedure: boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire. 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)Oil Change Due 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three timesYour vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change within 10 seconds.indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message willflash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
  • 331. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3333. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the Trip Computer functions. OFF/LOCK position. The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you tion:start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did notreset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.Fuel Economy 4Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “FuelEconomy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and pressthe SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWNbuttons until one of the following Fuel Economy func-tions displays in the EVIC:• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode• Distance To Empty (DTE) Fuel Economy• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
  • 332. 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELAverage Fuel Economy / ECO Fuel Saver Mode — Distance To Empty (DTE)If Equipped Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled withShows the average fuel economy since the last reset. the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance isWhen the fuel economy is reset, the display will read determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the and average fuel economy, according to the current fuelhistory information will be erased, and the averaging will tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECTcontinue from the last fuel average reading before the button.reset. NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicleThere is an ECO icon between the Compass and Outside loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance ofTemperature info at the top of the EVIC display. This icon the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.will appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)(MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four estimated driving distance, the DTE display will changecylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner. to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continueThis feature allows you to monitor when you are driving until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significantin a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOWdriving habits in order to increase fuel economy. FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
  • 333. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335Miles Per Gallon (MPG) Trip InfoThe Miles Per Gallon (MPG) feature displays instanta- Trip Aneous fuel economy in a bar graph below the DTE, this Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the lastfunction cannot be reset. Press the BACK button to return reset.to the main menu. Trip BVehicle Speed Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last 4Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle reset.Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press theSELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the Elapsed Timecurrent speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last resetbutton a second time will toggle the unit of measure when the ignition is in the ACC position. Elapsed timebetween mph or km/h. will increment when the ignition is in the ON/RUNNOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle position.Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in theEVIC.
  • 334. 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELTo Reset The Display Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicledisplayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through theresettable functions, press and hold the SELECT button available information displays, then press SELECT tofor two seconds. The current display will reset along with display any one of the following choices.other functions. • Coolant TempUnits Displays the actual coolant temperature.Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units” • Oil Temperaturedisplays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECTbutton. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if Displays the actual oil temperature.equipped) can be changed between English and Metric • Oil Pressureunits of measure. To make your selection, scroll up ordown until the preferred setting is highlighted, then Displays the actual oil pressure.press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark • Trans Temperatureappears next to the setting, showing that the setting hasbeen selected. Displays the actual transmission temperature.
  • 335. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337• Engine Hours Turn Menu OFFDisplays the number of hours of engine operation. Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Press- ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pressing• Tire Pressure any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings theShows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING menu back.THE SPARE TIRE). Uconnectா SETTINGSMessages # 4 The Uconnect௡ system uses a combination of soft andSelect from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons. hard keys located on the center of the instrument panelThis feature shows the number of stored warning mes- that allows you to access and change the customersages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button programmable features.will allow you to see what the stored messages are.Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Hard-KeysMenu. Hard-Keys are located on the left and right side of the Uconnect௡ 4.3 screen. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings
  • 336. 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL(i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the control knob one or Press the ЉSettingsЉ hard-key to access the Settings screen,more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF). use the Page Up/Down soft-keys to scroll through the following settings. Touch the desired setting soft key toSoft-Keys change the setting using the description shown on theSoft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect௡ touch-screen. following pages for each setting.Customer Programmable Features — Uconnectா4.3 SettingsIn this mode the Uconnect௡ system allows you to accessprogrammable features that may be equipped such asDisplay, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors &Locks, Heated Seats, Engine Off Operation, CompassSettings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setupthrough hard-keys and soft-keys.NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at atime. 1 — Uconnect௡ 4.3 Settings Hard-Key
  • 337. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 selecting any point on the scale between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. • Mode Touch the Mode soft-key to change this display. When in this display, you may select one of the auto display settings. To change Mode status press and release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key, then by touch the arrow back 4 soft-key. • Language Touch the Language soft-key to change this display. Uconnect௡ 4.3 Soft-Keys When in this display, you may select one of threeDisplay languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch• Brightness the English, French (Français) or Spanish (Español) soft-Touch the Brightness soft-key to change this display. key to select the language preferred. Then touch theWhen in this display, you may select display brightness arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the informationwith the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the will display in the selected language.brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by
  • 338. 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Units • Fuel Saver DisplayTouch the Units soft-key to change this display. When in Touch the Fuel Saver Display soft-key to turn the “ECO”this display, you may switch the EVIC, odometer, and message (located in the instrument cluster display) on ornavigation system (if equipped) between US and Metric off. To make your selection, touch the Fuel Saver Displayunits of measure. Touch US or Metric then touch the soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrowarrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information back soft-key.will display in the selected units of measure. Clock• Voice Response • Set TimeTouch the Voice Response soft-key to change the VoiceResponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response Touch the Set Time soft-key to change this display. WhenLength, press and release the Brief or Long soft-key. Then in this display, you may select the time display settings.touch the arrow back soft-key. To make your selection, touch the Set Time soft-key, adjust the hours and minutes using the up and down• Touch Screen Beep soft-keys, select AM or PM, select 12 hr or 24 hr. ThenTouch the Touch Screen Beep soft-key to turn on or shut touch the arrow back soft-key when all selections areoff the sound heard when a touch screen button (softkey) complete.is pressed. To change the Touch Screen Beep setting pressand release the ON or OFF soft-key, then touch the arrowback soft-key.
  • 339. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341• Show Time Status status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle inTouch the Show Time Status soft-key to change this front of you when you are farther away. This gives youdisplay. When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the most reaction time. To change the setting for morethe digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This warns youTime Status setting, press and release the ON or OFF of a possible collision when you are much closer to thesoft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. vehicle in front of you. This allows for a more dynamic• Sync Time – If Equipped driving experience. To change the FCW status, press and 4 release the OFF, Near or Far button. Then touch the arrowTouch the Sync Time soft-key to change this display. back soft-key.When in this display, you may have the radio set the timeautomatically. To change the Sync Time setting, press and For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise Con-release the ON or OFF soft-key. Then touch the arrow trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Yourback soft-key. Vehicle”.Safety / Assistance • Park Assist• Front Collision Warning — If Equipped Touch the Park Assist soft-key to change this display. TheTouch the Front Collision Warning soft-key to change this Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind thedisplay. The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSEbe can be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The
  • 340. 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELsystem can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound and • Blind Spot AlertDisplay, or turned OFF. To change the Park Assist status, Touch the Blind Spot Alert soft-key to change this dis-press and release the OFF, Sound Only or Sounds and play. When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot AlertDisplay soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. feature can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. TheRefer to “ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist” in “Understand- Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights”ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Moni-and operating information. tor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) willTouch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft-key to change this show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as andisplay. When this feature is selected, the outside rear- audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” isview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch thethe REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to OFF, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch thetheir previous position when the transmission is shifted arrow back soft-key.out of REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the TiltMirrors In Reverse soft-key and select ON or OFF. Thentouch the arrow back soft-key.
  • 341. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in and operating information. To make your selection, touchthe area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is the Hill Start Assist soft-key and select ON or OFF. Thennot damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. touch the arrow back soft-key.Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor Lightsalignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will resultin the BSM not operating to specification. • Illuminated Approach• Rain Sensing Touch the Illuminated Approach soft-key to change this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights will 4Touch the Rain Sensing soft-key to change this display. activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds whenWhen this feature is selected, the system will automati- the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entrycally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture (RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approachon the windshield. To make your selection, touch the status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90 soft-key. Then touch theRain Sensing soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch arrow back soft-key.the arrow back soft-key. • Headlights With Wipers• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped Touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-key to change thisTouch the Hill Start Assist soft-key to change this display. display. When this feature is selected, and the headlightWhen this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turnsystem is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turnedSystem” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
  • 342. 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELon. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are your selection, touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow backyour selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers soft- soft-key.key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back • Steering Directed Lights – If Equippedsoft-key. Touch the Steering Directed Lights soft-key to change this• Auto High Beams “SmartBeams™” display. When this feature is selected, the headlights turnTouch the Auto High Beams soft-key to change this relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel. Todisplay. When this feature is selected, the high beam make your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lightsheadlights will deactivate automatically under certain soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrowconditions. To make your selection, touch the Auto High back soft-key.Beams soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the • Flash Lights With Lockarrow back soft-key. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — IfEquipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft-key to changeVehicle” for further information. this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the• Daytime Running Lights – If Available Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This featureTouch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key to change may be selected with or without the sound horn on lockthis display. When this feature is selected, the headlightswill turn on whenever the engine is running. To make
  • 343. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345feature selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-Headlights With Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF. ter. To make your selection, touch the Flash Lights WithThen touch the arrow back soft-key. Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.Doors & Locks• Auto Unlock On Exit • Sound Horn With Remote StartTouch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft-key to change this Touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key to change this display. When this feature is selected, the 4display. When this feature is selected, all doors willunlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission horn will sound when the remote start is activated. Tois in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s make your selection, touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch thedoor is opened. To make your selection, touch the AutoUnlock On Exit soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then arrow back soft-key.touch the arrow back soft-key. • Sound Horn With Lock• Flash Lights With Lock Touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft-key to change thisTouch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key to change this display. When this feature is selected, the horn will chirpdisplay. When this feature is selected, the front and rear when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remoteturn signals will flash when the doors are locked or Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection, touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
  • 344. 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Remote Door Unlock Order Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed, touching the handle more than once will only result inTouch the Remote Door Unlock Order soft-key to change the driver’s door opening. If Unlock Driver Door Onlythis display. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press On 1st Press is selected, once the driver door is opened,is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used topress of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter unlock all the doors (or use the RKE transmitter).UNLOCK button. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1stPress is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter • Memory Linked to FOBUNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. Touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft-key to change thisWhen Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of the display. This feature provides automatic driver seat po-doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter sitioning to enhance driver mobility when entering andUNLOCK button. exiting the vehicle, driver 1 and driver 2 last mode,NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter- settings and presets. To make your selection, touch theN-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to Memory Linked to FOB soft-key and select ON or OFF.Unlock All Doors On 1st Press, all doors will unlock no Then touch the arrow back soft-key.matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle isgrasped. If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press isprogrammed, only the driver’s door will unlock whenthe driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if
  • 345. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection,location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key and select ON orto ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding Engine Off OptionsThe Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. • Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped• Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go) Touch the Easy Exit Seats soft-key to change this display.Touch the Passive Entry soft-key to change this display. This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to 4This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting thedoor(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seatsor unlock buttons. To make your selection, touch the soft-key, and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrowPassive Entry soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch back soft-key. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Under-the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further infor-“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. mation.Heated Seats • Headlight Off Delay• Auto Heated Seats Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft-key to change thisTouch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key to change this display. When this feature is selected, the driver candisplay. When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or
  • 346. 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Compass SettingsHeadlight Off Delay status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90 • Variancesoft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. Touch the Variance soft-key to change this display. Com-• Engine Off Power Delay pass Variance is the difference between Magnetic NorthTouch the Engine Off Power Delay soft-key to change this and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-display. When this feature is selected, the power window ences, the variance should be set for the zone where theswitches, radio, Uconnect௡ phone system (if equipped), vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if the compass will automatically compensate for the dif-equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to ferences, and provide the most accurate compass head-10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening ing.either front door will cancel this feature. To change the NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top ofEngine Off Power Delay status, touch the 0 seconds, 45 the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compassarrow back soft-key. module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
  • 347. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 calibrate the compass by touching the ON soft-key and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally. NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, 4 etc. Audio Compass Variance Map • Equalizer• Calibration Touch the Equalizer soft-key to change this display.Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This When in this display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid andcompass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scalecompass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow backCAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also soft-key.
  • 348. 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your mode. To make your selection, press the Surround Soundfinger up or down to change the setting as well as press soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrowdirectly on the desired setting. back soft-key.• Balance / Fade Phone / BluetoothTouch the Balance / Fade soft-key to change this display. • Paired DevicesWhen in this display, you may adjust the Balance and This feature shows which phones are paired to theFade settings. Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer• Speed Adjusted Volume to the Uconnect௡ Supplement.Touch the Speed Adjusted Volume soft-key to change this SIRIUS Setupdisplay. This feature increases or decreases volume rela- • Channel Skiptive to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group ofVolume, press the OFF, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch thearrow back soft-key. channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make• Surround Sound your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select theTouch the Surround Sound soft-key to change this dis- channels you would like to skip. Then touch the arrowplay. This feature provides simulated surround sound back soft-key.
  • 349. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351• Subscription Info Customer Programmable Features — Uconnectா 8.4 SettingsNew vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a freelimited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with Press the More soft-key, then press the Settings soft-keyyour radio. Following the expiration of the free services,to display the menu setting screen. In this mode theit will be necessary to access the information on the Uconnect௡ system allows you to access programmableSubscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe. features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-OnTouch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub- Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass 4scription Information screen. Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup.Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at areactivate your service, either call the number listed on time.the screen or visit the provider online. When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter theNOTE: SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription. desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been se- lected. Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu or press the X
  • 350. 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELsoft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scaleUp or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow backscreen will allow you to toggle up or down through the soft-key.available settings. • Display Brightness With Headlights OFFDisplay When in this display, you may select the brightness withAfter pressing the Display soft-key the following settings the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –will be available. setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale• Display Mode between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.When in this display you may select one of the autodisplay settings. To change Mode status, touch and • Set Languagerelease the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the When in this display, you may select one of threearrow back soft-key. languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip• Display Brightness With Headlights ON functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desiredWhen in this display, you may select the brightness with language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to thethe headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and – language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
  • 351. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353• Units pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing thatWhen in this display, you may select to have the EVIC, setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keyodometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed to return to the previous menu.between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US orMetric until a check-mark appears next to the setting, • Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Clustershowing that setting has been selected. Touch the back When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directionsarrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a 4• Voice Response Length designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn InWhen in this display, you may change the Voice Re- Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to thesponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch theLength, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.check-mark appears next to the setting, showing thatsetting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key • Fuel Saver Display In Clusterto return to the previous menu. The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster• Touchscreen Beep display, this message can be turned on or off. To make your selection, touch the Fuel Saver Display soft-key,When in this display, you may turn on or shut off thesound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
  • 352. 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELuntil a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key tothat setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key tosoft-key to return to the previous menu. close out of the settings screen.Clock • Set Time MinutesAfter pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. Thewill be available. Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To• Sync Time With GPS make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-keyWhen in this display, you may automatically have the to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key toradio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting touch close out of the settings screen.the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-markappears next to the setting, showing that setting has been • Time Formatselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the When in this display, you may select the time formatprevious menu. display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a• Set Time Hours check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the backWhen in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To makeyour selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
  • 353. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355• Show Time In Status Bar driving, select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to theWhen in this display, you may turn on or shut off the vehicle in front of you. This allows for a more dynamicdigital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time driving experience. To change the FCW status, touch andStatus setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft-key release the OFF, Near or Far button. Then touch the arrowuntil a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that back soft-key.setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keyto return to the previous menu. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con- trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your 4Safety / Assistance Vehicle”.After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the fol- • Park Assistlowing settings will be available.• Front Collision Sensitivity — If Equipped The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE-The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mphset to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status of (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will warn Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Parkyou of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you Assist status, touch and release the OFF, Sound Only orwhen you are farther away. This gives you the most Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow backreaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic
  • 354. 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELsoft-key. Refer to “ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist” in (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys- alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”tem function and operating information. mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” isWhen this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir- selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch theposition and the transmission shift lever is in the RE- Off, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch theVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their arrow back soft-key.previous position when the transmission is shifted out of NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage inREVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia isIn Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensorback arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result• Blind Spot Alert in the BSM not operating to specification.When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature • ParkView௡ Backup Cameracan be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView௡ RearSpot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screenWhen this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
  • 355. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever • Hill Start Assist — If Equippedthe shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Controlcaution note to “check entire surroundings” across the System” in “Starting And Operating” for system functiontop of the screen. After five seconds, this note will and operating information. To make your selection, touchdisappear. The ParkView௡ camera is located on the rear the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appearsof the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.selection, touch the ParkView௡ Backup Camera soft-key, Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous 4until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that menu.setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keyto return to the previous menu. Lights• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings will be available.When this feature is selected, the system will automati-cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture • Headlight Illumination On Approachon the windshield. To make your selection, touch the When this feature is selected, the headlights will activateRain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doorssetting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
  • 356. 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELtouch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing thatinterval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keyprevious menu. to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Lights/ Smart- Beam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped Of Your Vehicle” for further information.When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is • Daytime Running Lights – If Availablein the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn onThe headlights will also turn off when the wipers are whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until ayour selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey, check-mark appears next to setting, showing that settinguntil a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key tosetting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key return to the previous menu.to return to the previous menu. • Steering Directed Lights – If Equipped• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relativeEquipped to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To makeWhen this feature is selected, the high beam headlights your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights softkey,will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. Tomake your selection, touch the Auto High Beams softkey,
  • 357. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that • Auto Unlock On Exitsetting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock whento return to the previous menu. the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the• Flash Headlights With Lock PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto UnlockWhen this feature is selected, the headlights will flash On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next towhen the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch theKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be 4 back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.selected with or without the sound horn on lock featureselected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Head- • Flash Headlight With Locklights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears When this feature is selected, the headlights will flashnext to setting, showing that setting has been selected. whe n the doors are locked or unlocked with the RemoteTouch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,menu. touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key, until a check-Doors & Locks mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return toAfter pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following the previous menu.settings will be available.
  • 358. 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Sound Horn With Lock Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must pressWhen this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock thethe remote start is activated. To make your selection, passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Presstouch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a check- is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first pressmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return tothe previous menu. NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which• Sound Horn With Remote Start Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1stWhen this feature is selected, the horn will sound when Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only thethe remote start is activated. To make your selection, driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door istouch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fobcheck-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more thanhas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to once will only result in the driver’s door opening. Ifreturn to the previous menu. driver door first is selected, once the driver door is• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only thedriver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
  • 359. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361• Passive Entry NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is setThis feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterdoor(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver MemoryEntry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a for further information.check-mark appears next to setting, showing that settinghas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N- Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start 4Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start• Personal Settings Linked To FOB — If Equipped soft-key the following settings will be available.This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to • Horn With Remote Startenhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the When this feature is selected, the horn will sound whenvehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory the remote start is activated. To make your selection,Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until ato setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch check-mark appears next to setting, showing that settingthe back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
  • 360. 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat andheated steering wheel will automatically turn on when • Engine Off Power Delaytemperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera- When this feature is selected, the power windowtures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will switches, radio, Uconnect௡ phone system (if equipped),turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (ifSeats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up toshowing that setting has been selected. Touch the back 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Openingarrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. either front door will cancel this feature. To change theEngine Off Options Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch theAfter pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol- arrow back soft-key.lowing settings will be available.• Easy Exit Seat • Headlight Off DelayThis feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to When this feature is selected, the driver can choose toenhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 secondsvehicle. To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
  • 361. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top ofdesired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,return to the previous menu. Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with theCompass Settings compass sensor, and it may give false readings.After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the follow-ing settings will be available.• Variance 4Compass Variance is the difference between MagneticNorth and Geographic North. To compensate for thedifferences the variance should be set for the zone wherethe vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properlyset, the compass will automatically compensate for thedifferences, and provide the most accurate compassheading. Compass Variance Map
  • 362. 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Perform Compass Calibration • EqualizerTouch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid andcompass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scalecompass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow backCAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also soft-key.calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide yourcompleting one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free finger up or down to change the setting as well as touchfrom large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL directly on the desired setting.indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compasswill now function normally. • Speed Adjusted VolumeAudio This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted VolumeAfter pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrowwill be available. back soft-key.• Balance/FadeWhen in this display you may adjust the Balance andFade settings.
  • 363. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365• Music Info Cleanup • Paired DevicesThis feature helps organize music files for optimized This feature shows which phones are paired to themusic navigation. To make your selection, touch the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, referMusic Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by to the Uconnect௡ Supplement.pressing the arrow back soft-key. SiriusXM™ Setup• Surround Sound After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the followingThis feature provides simulated surround sound mode. settings will be available. 4To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound • Channel Skipsoft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrowback soft-key. SiriusXM™ can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or toPhone/Bluetooth exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To makeAfter pressing the Phone/Bluetooth soft-key the follow- your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select theing settings will be available. channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
  • 364. 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Subscription Information iPodா/USB/MP3 CONTROLNew vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free This feature allows an iPod௡ or external USB device to belimited time subscription to SiriusXM™ Satellite Radio plugged into the USB port.with your radio. Following the expiration of the free iPod௡ control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod௡services, it will be necessary to access the information on and iPhone௡ devices. Some iPod௡ software versions maythe Subscription Information screen in order to re- not fully support the iPod௡ control features. Please visitsubscribe. Apple’s website for software updates.Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub- For further information, refer to the Uconnect௡ User’sscription Information screen. Manual.Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. Toreactivate your service, either call the number listed on HARMAN KARDONா Logic7ா HIGHthe screen or visit the provider online. PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLENOTE: SiriusXM™ Travel Link is a separate subscrip- SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPEDtion. Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon௡ audio system with GreenEdge™ technology that offers superior sound quality, higher Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) and reduced energy consumption. The new system utilizes
  • 365. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliver- AUX input; and is activated through the Electronicing substantial increases in component and system effi- Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-ciency levels. Selectable Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “UnderstandingThe 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge high efficiency Your Instrument Panel”.amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking powersupply and drives a 7.4-channel playback architecture. Selecting “Surround Sound” through the DSS modesThe Harman Kardon௡ audio system offers the ability to activates the Harman Kardon௡ Logic7௡ multichannelchoose Logic 7 surround sound for any audio source. The surround-sound technology in your vehicle. Some audio 4GreenEdge high-efficiency speaker designs ensure the will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo mode.system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in dy- When in “Surround Sound” mode, balance is set auto-namic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for maxi- matically. Fader control is available in surround modemum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplifier but should be set to the center position for optimaloutput stage ensuring state of the art multi-seat surround surround performance.sound processing.Logic7௡ multichannel surround-sound technology deliv-ers an immersive, accurate sound-stage to every seatingposition This surround effect is available for audio fromany source - AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or dashboard
  • 366. 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELSTEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with aEQUIPPED pushbutton in the center and controls the volume andThe remote sound system controls are located on the rear mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rockersurface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.access the switches. Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ CD/AUX/VES, etc.). The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in. The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode. Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
  • 367. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCEwill tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the followinggrammed in the radio preset pushbutton. precautions:CD Player 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching thePressing the top of the switch once will go to the next surface.track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the 4 wiping from center to edge.beginning of the previous track if it is within one secondafter the current track begins to play. 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the ing the disc.second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,The center button on the left side rocker switch has no or anti-static sprays.function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, thecenter button will select the next available CD in the 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.player. 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.
  • 368. 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- CLIMATE CONTROLSlar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective The air conditioning and heating system is designed tocoating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) make you comfortable in all types of weather. Thisoversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known system can be operated through either the Automaticgood disc before considering disc player service. Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through theRADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Uconnect௡ system display.Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in When the Uconnect௡ system is in different modes (Radio,your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passengeryour radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated temperature settings will be indicated at the top of theby relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is display.not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does General Overviewnot satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of theantenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be Hard-Keysturned down or off during mobile phone operation when Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of thenot using Uconnect௡ (if equipped). Uconnect௡ 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument panel. There are also hard-keys located below the Uconnect௡ touch-screen.
  • 369. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371 4Uconnect௡ 4.3 — Hard-key Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-keys (ATC System Shown)
  • 370. 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELSoft-KeysSoft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect௡ system screen. Uconnect௡ 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Soft-Keys Uconnect௡ 4.3 Manual Temperature Controls — Soft-keys
  • 371. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373Button Descriptions 4. AUTO Operation Button(Applies To Both Hard-keys And Soft-keys) Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by1. MAX A/C Button adjusting airflow distribution and amount. PerformingPress and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the ATC to switch betweenindicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automaticthis function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information.switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button 4will turn off. Press and release to change the current airflow setting to2. A/C Button Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-Press and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATCindicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this to switch into manual mode. The blower speed mayfunction again will cause the A/C operation to switch increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the frontinto manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.3. Recirculation Button 6. Rear Defrost ButtonPress and release to change the current setting, theindicator illuminates when ON. Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
  • 372. 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELAn indicator will illuminate when the rear window 7. Rear Climate Buttondefroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically Press and release this button to turn on the rear climateturns off after 10 minutes. controls (if equipped). The indicator will illuminate when the rear climate controls are ON. Performing this function CAUTION! again will turn OFF the rear climate controls. Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to 8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear Provides the passenger with independent temperature window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on control. Push the button for warmer temperature set- the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth tings. and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after automatically exit Sync. soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive 9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button window cleaners on the interior surface of the Provides the passenger with independent temperature window. control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
  • 373. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 37510. SYNC operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)po- sition. Blower control should be left in the “ON” positionPress the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. to allow the climate control to either warm or cool theThe Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is vehicle.enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passengertemperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Hard-keyChanging the passenger temperature setting while in The blower speed increases as you turn the controlSync will automatically exit this feature. clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise. 411. Blower ControlBlower control is used to regulate the amount of air Soft-keyforced through the climate system. There are seven Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower settingblower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower barspeeds can be selected using either hard-heys or soft-keys area between the icons.as follows:NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, theclimate controls will not function during Remote Start
  • 374. 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL12. Modes NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con- ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets andThe airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air warmer air from the floor outlets.comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are • Floor Modeas follows: Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side• Panel Mode window demister outlets. Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually • Mix Mode adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of Air comes from the floor, defrost and side windowthe center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up demist outlets. This mode works best in cold orand down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. snowy conditions.There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to • Defrost Modeshut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these Air comes from the windshield and side windowoutlets. demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum• Bi-Level Mode temperature settings for best windshield and side win- Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and dow defrosting and defogging. When the defrost mode is floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed selected, the blower level may will increase. through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
  • 375. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 37713. Climate Control OFF Button 16. Temperature Control (Manual Temperature Control Only)Press and release this button to turn the Climate ControlON/OFF. Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the tempera- ture of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmerProvides the driver with independent temperature con- temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the bluetrol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings. area indicates cooler temperatures. 4NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically Climate Control Functionsadjust the passenger temperature setting at the same A/C (Air Conditioning)time. The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioningProvides the driver with independent temperature con- system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings. cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/CNOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically button to turn off the air conditioning and manuallyadjust the passenger temperature setting at the same adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, maketime. sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
  • 376. 378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, is ON. Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be of the windows. adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. select Defrost mode and increase blower speed. MAX A/C• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo- MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of mance. Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from and the prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when the front of the radiator and through the condenser. MAX A/C is ON.MAX A/C In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-mance. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C opera- tion to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
  • 377. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379Recirculation Control Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) When outside air contains smoke, odors, or ATC Hard-keys are located in the center of the instru- high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, ment panel. you may wish to recirculate interior air by Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect௡ Touch-screen. pressing the Recirculation control button. Therecirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is Automatic Operationselected. Push the button a second time to turn off the 1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (9) on theRecirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle. 4 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like thelead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation fea- system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-ture may be unavailable (soft-key greyed out) if condi- senger temperature hard or soft control buttons (8, 9,tions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the 14, 15). Once the desired temperature is displayed, thewindshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, system will achieve and automatically maintain thatthe Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to comfort level.improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will bedisabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempt- 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it ising to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-LED in the control button to blink and then turn off. ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.
  • 378. 380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELNOTE: The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts allows the front occupants to control the volume of air the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode. comfort as quickly as possible. The operator can also select the direction of the airflow• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable operation and Recirculation control can also be manually feature. Refer to the “Uconnect௡ System Settings” in selected in Manual operation. this section of the manual. Operating TipsTo provide you with maximum comfort in the Automaticmode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section foron low until the engine warms up. The blower will suggested control settings for various weather condi-increase in speed and transition into Auto mode. tions.Manual Operation Summer OperationThe system allows for manual selection of blower speed, The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehiclesair distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con- must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolanttrol. to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
  • 379. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene Window Foggingglycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended. Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. TheVehicle” for proper coolant selection. Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clearWinter Operation windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win- dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild butis not recommended because it may cause window 4 rainy or humid weather.fogging. NOTE:Vacation StorageAny time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service • Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air periods, as fogging may occur.conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce oradequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.of compressor damage when the system is started again. When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
  • 380. 382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELOutside Air Intake A/C Air FilterMake sure the air intake, located directly in front of the The climate control system filters outside air containingwindshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot becollected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” inenter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, tions.slush, and snow.
  • 381. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions 4
  • 382. STARTING AND OPERATINGCONTENTSⅥ STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Ⅵ AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .395 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 ▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .397 ▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 ▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission – 5 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 ▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 ▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Ⅵ AUTOSTICK௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413Ⅵ ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .395 ▫ Operation – Eight-Speed Transmission (If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
  • 383. 386 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Operation – Five-Speed Transmission . . . . . . .415 Ⅵ ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .426Ⅵ SPORT MODE (5.7L ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED . . .417 Ⅵ ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .428Ⅵ ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .418 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .428Ⅵ DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .419 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .429 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .430Ⅵ DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 ▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 ▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434Ⅵ POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435Ⅵ FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY (IF EQUIPPED) — 5.7L ENGINE ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 ▫ Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436Ⅵ PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
  • 384. STARTING AND OPERATING 387Ⅵ TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 ▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 ▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .452 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .440 ▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .441 ▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .453 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .442 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454Ⅵ TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .447 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 5 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 ▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .450 Ⅵ TIRE CHAINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Ⅵ TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .459 ▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Ⅵ TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .460 ▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped. .451 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 ▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
  • 385. 388 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .465 Ⅵ FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 ▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474Ⅵ FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 ▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 ▫ 3.6L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 ▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 ▫ 5.7L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 ▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 ▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .471 ▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 ▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 ▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Ⅵ ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 ▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .481
  • 386. STARTING AND OPERATING 389Ⅵ VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 ▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 ▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 ▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .483 ▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 ▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .483 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 ▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Ⅵ RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND ▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496Ⅵ TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 5 ▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . . . .496 ▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
  • 387. 390 STARTING AND OPERATINGSTARTING PROCEDURES WARNING! (Continued)Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (orinside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if in a location accessible to children), and do notpresent, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-belts. Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move WARNING! the vehicle. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key Automatic Transmission fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a before shifting into any driving gear. number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. (Continued)